1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Index idx
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
504 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
515 \begin_layout Chapter
516 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
520 \begin_layout Section
521 Basic File Operations
522 \begin_inset Index idx
525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
534 \begin_layout Standard
539 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
540 in addition to some more advanced operations:
543 \begin_layout Itemize
565 \begin_layout Itemize
581 arg "buffer-new-template"
587 \begin_layout Itemize
609 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
633 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "buffer-write-as"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Standard
702 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
703 a few minor differences.
706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
717 command lists the available templates.
718 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
719 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
720 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
728 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
735 \begin_layout Standard
736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
769 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
770 is just that — a big, blank space.
778 \begin_layout Standard
799 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
804 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
807 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
825 will reload the document from disk.
826 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
827 and want to restore it to the last save.
836 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
837 them as your changes.
840 \begin_layout Section
841 Basic Editing Features
842 \begin_inset Index idx
845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
854 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
861 \begin_layout Standard
862 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
863 can perform cut and paste operations
864 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
865 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
866 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
867 editing features and how to access
869 We will start with cut and paste.
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 As you might expect, the
877 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
878 various other editing features.
879 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
883 \begin_layout Itemize
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
921 \begin_layout Itemize
927 \begin_inset Index idx
930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 \begin_layout Itemize
965 \begin_inset Index idx
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1039 \begin_inset Index idx
1042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 The first three are self-explanatory.
1075 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1076 and other programs by
1097 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1098 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1103 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1104 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1105 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1106 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1107 into individual cells.
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1116 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1117 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1121 \begin_layout Standard
1125 \begin_inset space ~
1130 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1132 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1148 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1149 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1155 \begin_inset space \space{}
1158 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1159 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1162 \begin_inset space ~
1165 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1184 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1185 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1187 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1191 \begin_inset space ~
1196 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1197 start a new paragraph.
1198 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1199 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1204 \begin_inset space ~
1207 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1224 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1227 paste from the primary selection.
1228 This is normally the currently selected text.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1258 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1264 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1281 button to skip the current word.
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1301 If the toggle is set, searching for
1302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1313 will not match the word
1314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1328 Match whole words only
1330 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1331 to only find complete words, e.
1332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1361 offers also an advanced
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 feature that is described in sec.
1374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1380 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1387 \begin_layout Standard
1388 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1403 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1408 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1419 arg "inset-select-all"
1422 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1423 When the cursor is inside an inset
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 selects the content of the inset.
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1441 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1444 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1448 \begin_layout Section
1450 \begin_inset Index idx
1453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1472 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1482 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1488 or the toolbar button
1494 to undo some mistake.
1495 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1500 or the toolbar button
1507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1514 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1518 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1521 \begin_layout Standard
1522 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1532 This is a consequence of the 100
1533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1536 step undo limit mentioned above.
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1548 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1550 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1554 \begin_layout Section
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1572 \begin_layout Enumerate
1577 \begin_layout Itemize
1582 once anywhere in the edit window.
1583 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1587 \begin_layout Enumerate
1592 \begin_layout Itemize
1599 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1605 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1606 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1620 \begin_layout Enumerate
1621 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1625 \begin_layout Standard
1626 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1627 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1631 \begin_layout Section
1633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1635 name "sec:Navigating"
1640 \begin_inset Index idx
1643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1727 \begin_layout Subsection
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1740 Navigating ! Outline
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1759 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1760 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1761 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1769 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1773 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1785 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1791 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1792 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1793 dialog and to modify the citation.
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1799 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1800 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1808 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1811 \begin_layout Standard
1812 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1813 you further to control the display.
1818 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1819 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1825 option keeps it in the current view state.
1826 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1827 \begin_inset space ~
1830 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1831 \begin_inset space ~
1834 3, the subsections of sections
1835 \begin_inset space ~
1838 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1843 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1848 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1858 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1861 \begin_layout Standard
1868 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1869 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1883 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1884 So, for example, you can move section
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1892 2.4 or after section
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 (or the corresponding key bindings
1919 ) you can change the level of sections.
1920 So you can for example make section
1921 \begin_inset space ~
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_layout Subsection
1936 Horizontal Scrolling
1937 \begin_inset Index idx
1940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1941 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1951 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1957 \begin_inset space \space{}
1961 \begin_inset space ~
1964 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1965 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1966 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1970 \begin_layout Standard
1971 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1975 \begin_layout Itemize
1977 is used on a small tablet computer
1980 \begin_layout Itemize
1981 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_inset space ~
2006 \begin_layout Itemize
2007 Math constructs with long command names
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2012 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2014 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2015 windows so that table
2016 \begin_inset space ~
2020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2022 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2027 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2029 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2030 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2033 \begin_layout Standard
2034 \begin_inset Float table
2040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2041 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2046 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2050 Horizontal scrolling test.
2058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Tabular
2061 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2062 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2107 \begin_layout Section
2108 Input/Word Completion
2109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2111 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2116 \begin_inset Index idx
2119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_layout Standard
2162 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2164 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2165 is used to propose completions.
2168 \begin_layout Standard
2169 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2172 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2177 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2184 \begin_inset space ~
2188 \begin_inset space ~
2193 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2202 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2203 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2213 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2214 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2215 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2216 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2219 \begin_layout Standard
2221 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2222 completions available.
2227 key to accept a proposed completion.
2228 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2229 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2230 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2238 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2239 ing options for text.
2240 The special math option
2244 enables characters to be composed.
2245 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2246 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2249 , you can then input the characters
2250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2261 to a formula to get it.
2262 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2263 of the math toolbar.
2264 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2268 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2269 's installation folder.
2270 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2279 \begin_layout Section
2281 \begin_inset Index idx
2284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2323 \begin_inset Index idx
2326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2357 \begin_layout Standard
2358 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2372 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2375 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2379 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2386 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2393 \begin_layout Standard
2397 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset space ~
2426 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2430 \begin_layout Labeling
2431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2435 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2436 LatexCommand nomenclature
2438 description "Tabulator key"
2444 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2446 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2447 \begin_inset space ~
2451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2453 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2460 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2464 , especially section
2465 \begin_inset space ~
2469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2471 reference "subsec:Lists"
2477 If you are still confused, look in the
2482 \begin_inset Newline newline
2490 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2491 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2495 \begin_layout Labeling
2496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2500 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2501 LatexCommand nomenclature
2503 description "Escape key"
2510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2517 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2518 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2521 \begin_layout Labeling
2522 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2528 \begin_inset space ~
2532 \begin_inset space ~
2539 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2540 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2544 \begin_layout Standard
2545 There are three modifier keys:
2548 \begin_layout Labeling
2549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2567 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2568 LatexCommand nomenclature
2570 description "Control key"
2574 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2575 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2579 \begin_layout Itemize
2588 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2591 \begin_layout Itemize
2600 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2616 \begin_layout Labeling
2617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2635 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2636 LatexCommand nomenclature
2638 description "Shift key"
2642 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2643 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2646 \begin_layout Labeling
2647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2665 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2666 LatexCommand nomenclature
2668 description "Alt or Meta key"
2672 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2673 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2674 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2680 \begin_inset Newline newline
2683 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2685 menu accelerator keys
2688 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2689 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2694 For example, the sequence
2695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2701 \begin_inset space ~
2705 \begin_inset space ~
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2738 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2754 \begin_layout Standard
2759 manual lists all other things bound to the
2767 \begin_layout Standard
2768 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2770 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2771 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2772 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2773 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2774 The \SpecialChar LyX
2775 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2776 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2777 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2779 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2795 followed by a capital
2802 \begin_layout Chapter
2805 \begin_inset Index idx
2808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2818 \begin_layout Section
2820 \begin_inset Index idx
2823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2832 \begin_layout Subsection
2836 \begin_layout Standard
2837 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2838 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2839 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2840 numbering schemes, and so on.
2841 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2842 and format the title of your document differently.
2845 \begin_layout Standard
2850 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2851 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2852 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2853 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2854 picks one for you by default.
2855 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_inset Index idx
2863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2872 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2879 \begin_layout Standard
2880 You can select a class using the
2882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2883 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2887 \begin_inset Index idx
2890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2897 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2911 \begin_layout Description
2912 Article for basic articles
2915 \begin_layout Description
2916 Report for basic reports
2919 \begin_layout Description
2920 Book for writing a book
2923 \begin_layout Description
2924 Letter for US-style letters
2927 \begin_layout Standard
2928 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2929 only uses if you have installed
2930 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2931 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2932 distributions will include
2934 Here are some of the classes.
2935 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2937 Special Document Classes
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2950 \begin_layout Description
2951 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2955 \begin_layout Description
2956 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2962 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2963 There are three article layouts available.
2964 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2965 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2966 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2967 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2972 sequential numbering
2973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2976 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2977 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2978 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2979 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2982 \begin_layout Description
2983 Beamer Layout for presentations
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2988 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2989 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2990 with \SpecialChar LyX
2994 \begin_layout Description
2995 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2998 \begin_layout Description
3000 \begin_inset space ~
3003 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Foils Used to make transparencies
3014 \begin_layout Description
3015 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3016 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3017 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3018 with \SpecialChar LyX
3022 \begin_layout Description
3023 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3024 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3027 \begin_layout Description
3028 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3037 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3038 (Is used by this document.)
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3049 \begin_layout Description
3054 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3055 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3057 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 Slides Used to make transparencies
3065 \begin_layout Description
3067 \begin_inset space ~
3070 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3071 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3074 \begin_layout Description
3075 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3078 \begin_layout Standard
3079 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3081 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3083 Special Document Classes
3090 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3091 of the document classes.
3094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3098 \begin_layout Standard
3099 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3104 \begin_inset Index idx
3107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3124 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3125 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3127 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3130 \begin_layout Standard
3133 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3138 , are highly specialized.
3140 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3141 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3142 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3143 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3144 by some document class.
3145 There are just too many of them.
3146 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3149 \begin_layout Standard
3150 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3158 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3159 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3160 document class for a new file.
3162 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3165 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3172 manual for information on how to install them.
3173 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3179 \begin_layout Standard
3180 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3181 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3182 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3183 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3184 class files to be used for dissertation
3185 s submitted to those universities.
3186 The \SpecialChar LyX
3187 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3189 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3193 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3199 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3206 name "subsec:Modules"
3211 \begin_inset Index idx
3214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3223 \begin_layout Standard
3224 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3225 chosen document class.
3226 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3227 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3238 \begin_inset Index idx
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3252 \begin_layout Standard
3253 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3254 packages or file format converters that are not always
3255 installed by default.
3257 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3258 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3259 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3260 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3262 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3263 file without the missing prerequisites.
3264 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3265 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3268 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3272 \begin_inset Index idx
3275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3276 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3282 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3290 \begin_layout Standard
3291 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3301 will advise you about these things.
3309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3313 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3318 \begin_inset Index idx
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3322 Document ! Local Layout
3330 \begin_layout Standard
3331 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3332 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 : They are intended to be used in
3334 a variety of different documents.
3335 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3336 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3337 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3338 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3339 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3341 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3359 manual for information on how to use it.
3362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3366 \begin_layout Standard
3367 Each class has a default set of options.
3368 Here's a quick table describing them:
3371 \begin_layout Standard
3372 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3378 \begin_layout Standard
3380 \begin_inset Tabular
3381 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3382 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3383 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3384 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3385 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 \begin_layout Standard
3842 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3848 \begin_layout Standard
3849 You're probably also wondering what
3850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3854 \begin_inset space ~
3858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3862 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3863 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3868 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3873 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3883 headings, there are also
3891 headings, and so on.
3892 We will describe these headings fully in section
3893 \begin_inset space ~
3897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3899 reference "subsec:Headings"
3906 \begin_layout Subsection
3908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3910 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3915 \begin_inset Index idx
3918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3947 \begin_inset space ~
3955 \begin_inset space ~
3960 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3962 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3963 doesn't support special options you want to
3964 use for your document.
3965 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3966 -class and its options, you have to read
3970 \begin_layout Standard
3974 \begin_inset space ~
3981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3987 \begin_inset space ~
3992 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3993 You can choose between the following five options:
3996 \begin_layout Labeling
3997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4002 Use default page style of current class.
4005 \begin_layout Labeling
4006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4011 No page numbers or headings.
4014 \begin_layout Labeling
4015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4029 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4030 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4031 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4032 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4035 \begin_layout Labeling
4036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4041 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4042 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4048 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 -packages ! fancyhdr
4059 How they are defined is explained in section
4060 \begin_inset space ~
4064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4066 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4073 \begin_layout Standard
4074 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4075 \begin_inset space ~
4079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4081 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4088 \begin_layout Subsection
4089 Paper Size and Orientation
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4094 Document ! Paper size
4100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4102 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4109 \begin_layout Standard
4110 You can find the following options in the menu
4113 \begin_inset space ~
4120 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4124 \begin_inset Index idx
4127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4136 \begin_layout Labeling
4137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4141 \begin_inset space ~
4146 What size paper to print on.
4151 \begin_layout Itemize
4157 \begin_layout Itemize
4163 \begin_layout Itemize
4169 \begin_layout Itemize
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4178 US letter, US legal, US executive
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Labeling
4195 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4200 To choose whether to output as
4211 \begin_layout Labeling
4212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4216 \begin_inset space ~
4221 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4222 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4225 \begin_layout Subsection
4227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4229 name "subsec:Margins"
4234 \begin_inset Index idx
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4256 \begin_layout Standard
4257 Paper margins are set in the menu
4259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4263 \begin_inset Index idx
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_layout Standard
4276 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4277 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4278 the paper format and the font size into account.
4281 \begin_layout Subsection
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4292 That includes the paragraph environments.
4293 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4294 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4295 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4297 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4306 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4308 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4309 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4310 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4313 \begin_layout Section
4314 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4315 \begin_inset Index idx
4318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4319 Paragraph ! Indentation
4327 \begin_layout Subsection
4329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4331 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4338 \begin_layout Standard
4339 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4340 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4343 \begin_layout Standard
4344 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4345 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4346 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4347 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4351 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4357 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4358 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4359 language than English.
4361 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4364 \begin_layout Standard
4365 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4366 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4367 into \SpecialChar LyX
4369 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4372 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4374 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4375 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4376 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4383 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4384 goes to produce a printable file.
4389 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4391 gives you the ability globally to change
4395 these pre-coded spacings.
4396 We will explain more later.
4399 \begin_layout Subsection
4400 Paragraph Separation
4401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4403 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4408 \begin_inset Index idx
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4412 Paragraph ! Separation
4420 \begin_layout Standard
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4436 \begin_inset space ~
4443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4447 \begin_inset Index idx
4450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4456 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4459 \begin_layout Subsection
4463 \begin_layout Standard
4464 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4467 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4469 \begin_inset space ~
4474 dialog and toggle the
4477 \begin_inset space ~
4482 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4485 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4489 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4490 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4494 \begin_layout Standard
4495 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4496 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4499 \begin_layout Subsection
4501 \begin_inset Index idx
4504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4505 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4520 \begin_inset Index idx
4523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4532 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4536 \begin_inset space ~
4545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4546 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4552 \begin_inset Index idx
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 -packages ! setspace
4562 installed to use this feature.
4567 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4569 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4571 \begin_inset space ~
4576 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4577 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4580 \begin_layout Section
4581 Paragraph Environments
4582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4584 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4589 \begin_inset Index idx
4592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4593 Paragraph ! Environments
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph environments|(
4611 \begin_layout Subsection
4615 \begin_layout Standard
4616 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4619 \begin_layout Standard
4638 \begin_inset Newline newline
4641 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4643 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4644 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4645 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4654 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4657 \begin_layout Standard
4658 A paragraph environment is simply a
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4667 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4668 scheme, labels, and so on.
4669 Additionally, you can
4670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4677 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4678 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4679 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4680 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4682 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4684 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4688 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4689 \begin_inset Graphics
4690 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4696 at the left end of the toolbar.
4698 will change the environment of the
4702 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4703 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4704 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4708 \begin_layout Standard
4717 create a new paragraph using the
4721 paragraph environment.
4723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4730 because if you are in one of these environments:
4733 \begin_layout Itemize
4739 \begin_layout Itemize
4745 \begin_layout Itemize
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Standard
4777 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4781 , rather than resetting it to
4786 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4787 \begin_inset space ~
4791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4793 reference "sec:Nesting"
4800 \begin_layout Subsection
4804 \begin_layout Standard
4805 The default paragraph environment is
4810 It creates a plain paragraph.
4812 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4813 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4814 this manual) are in the
4821 \begin_layout Standard
4822 You can nest a paragraph using the
4826 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4834 \begin_layout Subsection
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4850 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4859 for thanks or contact information.
4860 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4861 places all of this on a separate page
4862 along with today's date.
4863 For other types of documents, the title
4864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4871 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4877 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4891 Here's how you use them:
4894 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 Put the title of your document in the
4902 \begin_layout Itemize
4903 Put the author name in the
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4911 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4912 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4918 Note that using this environment is optional.
4919 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4920 will automatically insert today's date.
4921 If you don't want a date, use the option
4923 Suppress default date on front page
4927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4928 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4930 \begin_inset space ~
4938 \begin_layout Standard
4939 You can use footnotes to insert
4940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4947 or contact information.
4950 \begin_layout Subsection
4952 \begin_inset Index idx
4955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4964 name "subsec:Headings"
4971 \begin_layout Standard
4972 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4974 takes care of the numbering for you.
4977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4979 \begin_inset Index idx
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4983 Section headings ! Numbered
4991 \begin_layout Standard
4992 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4996 \begin_layout Enumerate
5002 \begin_layout Enumerate
5008 \begin_layout Enumerate
5014 \begin_layout Enumerate
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Standard
5040 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5041 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5042 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5045 \begin_layout Standard
5046 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5047 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5048 You group the book into chapters.
5050 does a similar grouping:
5053 \begin_layout Itemize
5058 is divided into either
5069 \begin_layout Itemize
5081 \begin_layout Itemize
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Standard
5130 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5138 Not all document types use the
5142 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5147 is the top-level heading.
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5160 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5161 labels it with its number,
5162 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5164 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5182 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5190 \begin_layout Standard
5191 The unnumbered section headings have a
5192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5199 at the end of their name.
5200 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5201 the table of contents, see section
5202 \begin_inset space ~
5206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5216 Changing the Numbering
5217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5219 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5226 \begin_layout Standard
5227 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5228 in the Table of Contents.
5229 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5231 Just as certain classes start with
5245 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5255 This is something you can change.
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5265 \begin_inset Index idx
5268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5277 \begin_inset space ~
5281 \begin_inset space ~
5286 you will see two counters.
5291 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5292 numbers a section heading.
5293 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5298 Short Titles of Headings
5299 \begin_inset Index idx
5302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 Section headings ! Short titles
5309 \begin_inset Argument 1
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5328 \begin_layout Standard
5329 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5330 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5331 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5332 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5335 \begin_layout Standard
5337 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5338 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5339 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5340 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5345 \begin_inset space ~
5351 This will insert a box labeled
5352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5356 \begin_inset space ~
5360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5363 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5364 This also works for captions inside floats.
5365 There can only be one short title per title.
5368 \begin_layout Standard
5369 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5376 \begin_layout Standard
5377 The following information applies to all section headings:
5380 \begin_layout Itemize
5381 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5384 \begin_layout Itemize
5385 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
5389 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5392 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5396 \begin_layout Subsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5402 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5416 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5417 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5418 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5419 the text they contain.
5420 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5428 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5432 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5441 when you start a new paragraph.
5442 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5446 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5447 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5448 have to change back to the
5452 environment yourself.
5455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5464 \begin_inset Index idx
5467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5476 \begin_layout Standard
5477 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5478 time for the differences.
5487 are identical except for one difference:
5491 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5500 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 Here's an example of the
5517 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5519 See – no indentation!
5523 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5524 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5525 the other paragraph.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's another example, this time in the
5536 \begin_layout Quotation
5542 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5543 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5544 the first line, then
5548 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5552 you were quoting other text.
5555 \begin_layout Quotation
5556 Here's a new paragraph.
5557 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5558 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5561 \begin_layout Standard
5562 As the examples show,
5566 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5567 They should put quotes in the
5572 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5576 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_inset Index idx
5584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5610 \begin_layout Standard
5615 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5621 \begin_inset Newline newline
5624 Which I did not rehearse!
5628 It could be much worse.
5629 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5631 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5632 indented a bit more than the first.
5633 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5639 \begin_inset Newline newline
5642 And make things look fine
5643 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 arg "newline-insert newline"
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5660 does not indent both margins.
5661 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5662 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5665 arg "newline-insert newline"
5671 \begin_layout Subsection
5673 \begin_inset Index idx
5676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5692 \begin_layout Standard
5694 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5704 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5705 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 lets you provide your own label.
5716 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5717 describing some general features of all four of them.
5720 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5724 \begin_layout Standard
5725 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5727 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5728 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5737 reset the environment to
5741 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5742 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5743 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5747 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5751 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5758 \begin_layout Standard
5759 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5760 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5761 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5763 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5764 you read all of section
5765 \begin_inset space ~
5769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5771 reference "sec:Nesting"
5778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5780 \begin_inset Index idx
5783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5799 \begin_layout Standard
5800 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5804 paragraph environment.
5805 It has the following properties:
5808 \begin_layout Itemize
5809 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5813 \begin_layout Itemize
5815 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 The items can have any length.
5826 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5827 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 environment inside another
5843 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5851 \begin_layout Itemize
5853 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5856 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 \begin_inset space ~
5862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5864 reference "sec:Nesting"
5868 for a full explanation of nesting.
5872 \begin_layout Standard
5873 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5882 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5885 \begin_layout Standard
5886 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5887 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5890 \begin_layout Itemize
5891 The label for the first level
5895 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5899 \begin_layout Itemize
5900 The label for the second level is a dash.
5904 \begin_layout Itemize
5905 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 Back out to the third level.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 Back to the second level.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back to the outermost level.
5928 \begin_layout Standard
5929 These are the default labels for an
5934 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5939 dialog in the submenu
5944 \begin_inset Index idx
5947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5953 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5957 \begin_layout Standard
5958 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5959 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5961 \begin_inset space ~
5965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5967 reference "sec:Nesting"
5974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5976 \begin_inset Index idx
5979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5988 name "sec:Enumerate"
5995 \begin_layout Standard
6000 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6001 It has these properties:
6004 \begin_layout Enumerate
6005 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6009 \begin_layout Enumerate
6010 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6016 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6024 environment resets the counter to one.
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6042 Items can have any length.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6046 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6049 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6054 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6067 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6069 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6070 labels the four different levels in an
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 The first level of an
6082 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6086 \begin_layout Enumerate
6087 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6091 \begin_layout Enumerate
6092 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6100 \begin_layout Enumerate
6101 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 Back to the third level
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 Back to the second level.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the outermost level.
6120 \begin_layout Standard
6121 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6125 environment, see section
6126 \begin_inset space ~
6130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6132 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6137 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6141 \begin_layout Standard
6142 There is more to nesting
6146 environments than we've stated here.
6147 You should read section
6148 \begin_inset space ~
6152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6154 reference "sec:Nesting"
6158 to learn more about nesting.
6161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6163 \begin_inset Index idx
6166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6175 \begin_layout Standard
6176 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6180 list has no fixed label.
6181 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6190 of the first line as the label.
6194 \begin_layout Description
6195 Example: This is an example of the
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6204 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6208 \begin_layout Standard
6210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6217 it is meant that the first usage of the
6221 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6223 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6231 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6237 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6239 \begin_inset space ~
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6251 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6255 for more information.) Here is an example:
6258 \begin_layout Description
6260 \begin_inset space ~
6263 Example: This one shows how to use a
6266 \begin_inset space ~
6278 \begin_layout Description
6279 Usage: You should use the
6283 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6284 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6286 It's not a good idea to use a
6290 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6291 You're better off using
6303 paragraphs into them.
6306 \begin_layout Description
6307 Nesting: You can nest
6311 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6317 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6318 them from the first line.
6321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6323 \begin_inset Index idx
6326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6335 \begin_layout Standard
6340 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6341 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6354 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6356 Here are its properties:
6359 \begin_layout Labeling
6360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6362 \begin_inset space ~
6365 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6374 of each line as the item label.
6379 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6380 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6381 space as described above.
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6387 uses different margins for the item label and the
6388 body of the item text.
6389 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6390 label width plus a little extra space.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6397 \begin_inset space ~
6400 width \SpecialChar LyX
6401 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6402 If the label width is larger, the label
6403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6410 into the first line.
6411 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6412 margin of the rest of the item text.
6415 \begin_layout Labeling
6416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6418 \begin_inset space ~
6421 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6426 environment has the same left margin.
6427 \begin_inset Newline newline
6430 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6435 \begin_inset space ~
6440 dialog (toolbar button
6443 arg "layout-paragraph"
6450 \begin_inset space ~
6455 determines the default label width.
6456 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6465 multiple times instead.
6466 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6476 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6479 \begin_inset space ~
6484 every time you alter a label in a
6489 \begin_inset Newline newline
6492 The predefined default width is the length of
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 \begin_inset space ~
6507 \begin_layout Standard
6512 list the same way as the
6516 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6522 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6526 \begin_layout Standard
6531 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6532 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6534 \begin_inset space ~
6538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6540 reference "sec:Nesting"
6544 to learn about nesting.
6547 \begin_layout Standard
6548 There is yet another feature of the
6552 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6553 left-justifies the item labels by
6555 You can use additional
6559 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6560 justifies the item label.
6565 are documented in section
6566 \begin_inset space ~
6570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6572 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6577 Here are some examples:
6580 \begin_layout Labeling
6581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6582 Left The default for
6589 \begin_layout Labeling
6590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6591 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6598 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6601 \begin_layout Labeling
6602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6614 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6617 \begin_layout Subsection
6619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6621 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6626 \begin_inset Index idx
6629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6638 \begin_layout Standard
6639 The features described in this section require that the module
6641 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6643 is loaded in the document settings.
6644 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6655 -packages ! enumitem
6663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6664 Custom Enumerate Lists
6665 \begin_inset Index idx
6668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6669 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6677 \begin_layout Standard
6679 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6685 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6686 There you add the command
6689 \begin_layout Standard
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6710 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6711 Code, look at section
6712 \begin_inset space ~
6716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6718 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6731 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6738 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6739 For capital Roman numerals replace
6751 in the command above.
6752 For Arabic numerals use
6760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6767 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6792 You can only number 26
6793 \begin_inset space ~
6796 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6804 \begin_layout Standard
6805 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6806 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6810 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6813 \begin_layout Enumerate
6814 \begin_inset Argument 1
6817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6843 \begin_layout Enumerate
6844 \begin_inset Argument 1
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 \begin_layout Enumerate
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6876 \begin_inset Argument 1
6879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6903 \begin_layout Enumerate
6904 \begin_inset Argument 1
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 For this list these commands were used:
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6948 \begin_inset Newline newline
6956 \begin_inset Newline newline
6964 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_layout Standard
6981 makes the label emphasized and
6990 \begin_layout Standard
6991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7000 lists until you change the definition.
7008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7010 \begin_inset Index idx
7013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7014 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7022 \begin_layout Standard
7023 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7049 \begin_inset Note Note
7052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7053 goes back to default numbering
7061 \begin_layout Enumerate
7065 \begin_layout Standard
7069 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7074 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7079 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7080 to indicate that it is a resumed
7081 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7082 , but in the output.
7085 \begin_layout Standard
7086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7094 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7104 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7106 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7107 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7108 of a normal enumeration.
7109 There, insert the command
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7118 \begin_layout Standard
7123 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7127 \begin_layout Enumerate
7131 \begin_layout Enumerate
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7136 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7139 \begin_layout Enumerate
7140 \begin_inset Argument 1
7143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7159 This enumeration starts at 4
7162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7164 \begin_inset Index idx
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7176 \begin_layout Standard
7177 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7179 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7182 \begin_layout Itemize
7186 \begin_layout Itemize
7187 with standard spacing
7190 \begin_layout Standard
7191 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7193 Add there the command
7197 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7200 \begin_layout Itemize
7201 \begin_inset Argument 1
7204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7223 \begin_layout Itemize
7227 \begin_layout Itemize
7231 \begin_layout Standard
7232 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7239 \begin_inset Index idx
7242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7244 -packages ! enumitem
7250 For more information see its documentation,
7251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7260 \begin_layout Standard
7261 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7263 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7264 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7268 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7271 \begin_layout Enumerate
7272 \begin_inset Argument 1
7275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7283 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 with negative indentation
7300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7301 Further Customization
7302 \begin_inset Index idx
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7306 Lists ! Customization
7314 \begin_layout Standard
7315 You can also change the style of description lists.
7319 \begin_layout Standard
7325 \begin_layout Standard
7326 changes the description label font, the command
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 sets the list style.
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 An example where the command
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7348 itshape, style=nextline
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7355 \begin_layout Description
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7361 \begin_inset Argument 1
7364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7372 itshape, style=nextline
7382 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7383 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7387 \begin_layout Description
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7392 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7393 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7394 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7397 \begin_layout Standard
7398 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7404 \begin_inset Index idx
7407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7409 -packages ! enumitem
7415 For more information see its documentation
7416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7425 \begin_layout Subsection
7427 \begin_inset Index idx
7430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7441 \begin_inset space ~
7444 Address: An Overview
7447 \begin_layout Standard
7448 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7449 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7457 \begin_inset space ~
7463 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7464 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7465 gags on the document.
7466 In contrast, you can use the
7473 \begin_inset space ~
7478 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7479 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7483 \begin_layout Standard
7484 Of course, you're not limited to using
7491 \begin_inset space ~
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7506 some European academic papers.
7509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7513 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7520 \begin_layout Standard
7525 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7526 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7530 \begin_inset space ~
7535 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7536 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7537 Here's an example of each:
7540 \begin_layout Right Address
7542 \begin_inset Newline newline
7546 \begin_inset Newline newline
7550 \begin_inset Newline newline
7553 When is it? What is today?
7556 \begin_layout Standard
7560 \begin_inset space ~
7566 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7568 the largest block of text on a single line.
7569 Here's an example of the
7576 \begin_layout Address
7578 \begin_inset Newline newline
7581 Where do I send this
7582 \begin_inset Newline newline
7585 Your post office and country
7588 \begin_layout Standard
7589 As you can see, both
7596 \begin_inset space ~
7601 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7606 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7607 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7613 This makes sense, since
7621 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7622 Thus, you have to use
7629 arg "newline-insert newline"
7634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7635 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7637 \begin_inset space ~
7641 \begin_inset space ~
7646 ) to start a new line in an
7653 \begin_inset space ~
7661 \begin_layout Subsection
7665 \begin_layout Standard
7666 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7667 or list of references.
7669 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7674 \begin_inset Index idx
7677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7686 \begin_layout Standard
7691 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7692 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7693 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7694 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7708 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7709 The book document classes ignores the
7713 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7717 in a letter document class.
7720 \begin_layout Standard
7725 environment does several things for you.
7726 First, it puts the centered label
7727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7735 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7737 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7738 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7739 the subsequent text.
7740 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7742 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7747 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7751 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7752 The new paragraph will still be in the
7757 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7758 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7761 \begin_layout Standard
7762 \begin_inset Float figure
7767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7769 \begin_inset Graphics
7770 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7778 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7783 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7804 \begin_layout Standard
7805 We would love to demonstrate the
7809 environment, but since this document is in the
7810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7817 class, we can't do this.
7818 We inserted it therefore as figure
7819 \begin_inset space ~
7823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7825 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 If you have never heard of an
7831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7838 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7843 \begin_inset Index idx
7846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7855 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7862 \begin_layout Standard
7867 environment is used to list references.
7868 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7869 only use it at the end of the document.
7881 \begin_layout Standard
7882 When you first open a
7886 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7887 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7903 depending on the document class.
7904 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7905 Each paragraph of the
7909 environment is a bibliography entry.
7914 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7915 Each new paragraph is still in the
7922 \begin_layout Standard
7923 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7924 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7926 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7928 handling, have a look at section
7929 \begin_inset space ~
7933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7935 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7942 \begin_layout Subsection
7943 Special Environments
7946 \begin_layout Standard
7948 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7949 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7957 \begin_inset Index idx
7960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7970 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7983 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7985 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7990 key as a fixed whitespace.
7994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8007 \begin_inset space ~
8012 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8030 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8033 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8036 arg "newline-insert newline"
8053 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8054 So, when you finish using the
8059 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8060 Also, you can nest the
8065 environment inside of others.
8068 \begin_layout Standard
8069 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8072 \begin_layout Itemize
8076 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8084 \begin_inset space \space{}
8094 arg "newline-insert newline"
8100 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8114 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8120 \begin_layout Itemize
8121 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8122 You must put at least one
8126 in any line you want blank.
8127 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8131 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8136 since that will insert
8141 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8144 arg "self-insert \""
8150 \begin_layout Standard
8154 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8158 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8162 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8166 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8170 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8171 printf("Hello World!
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout Standard
8185 This is just the standard
8186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8197 \begin_layout Standard
8203 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8205 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8206 as if you used a typewriter.
8207 \begin_inset Index idx
8210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 Paragraph environments|)
8216 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8219 Program Code Listings
8224 \begin_inset space ~
8232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8236 \begin_inset Index idx
8239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8248 \begin_layout Standard
8253 environment is similar to the
8258 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8259 computer console text.
8264 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8278 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8279 you can have empty lines.
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8293 have a certain language and a text style
8296 \begin_layout Itemize
8297 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8298 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8299 and \SpecialChar TeX
8303 \begin_layout Standard
8304 Because of these properties
8308 works like a typewriter.
8312 \begin_layout Verbatim
8317 \begin_layout Verbatim
8321 The following 2 lines are empty:
8324 \begin_layout Verbatim
8328 \begin_layout Verbatim
8332 \begin_layout Verbatim
8334 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8344 environment is identical to
8348 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8349 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8361 \begin_layout Section
8362 Nesting Environments
8363 \begin_inset Index idx
8366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8367 Nesting ! Environments
8373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8382 \begin_layout Subsection
8386 \begin_layout Standard
8388 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8390 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8392 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8394 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8406 \begin_layout Enumerate
8410 \begin_layout Enumerate
8415 \begin_layout Enumerate
8419 \begin_layout Enumerate
8424 \begin_layout Enumerate
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8429 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8430 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8432 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8434 \begin_inset space ~
8438 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_inset space ~
8450 \begin_inset space ~
8455 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8457 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8460 arg "depth-increment"
8466 arg "depth-decrement"
8480 arg "depth-increment"
8486 arg "depth-decrement"
8490 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8491 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8495 \begin_layout Standard
8496 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8497 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8498 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8499 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8500 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8503 \begin_layout Standard
8504 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8506 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8508 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8511 \begin_layout Subsection
8512 What You Can and Can't Nest
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8516 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8517 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8522 than a simple yes or no.
8523 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8526 \begin_layout Itemize
8527 Completely unnestable
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8540 \begin_layout Standard
8541 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8542 environments have them:
8545 \begin_layout Description
8546 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8547 Can't nest into them.
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8569 \begin_layout Itemize
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Description
8584 \begin_inset space ~
8587 Nestable You can nest them.
8588 You can nest other things into them.
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8610 \begin_layout Itemize
8616 \begin_layout Itemize
8622 \begin_layout Itemize
8628 \begin_layout Itemize
8634 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Description
8655 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8656 You can't nest anything into them.
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8678 \begin_layout Itemize
8684 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_inset space ~
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Standard
8756 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8764 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8774 \begin_inset space ~
8777 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8778 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8779 nested section headings violate this.
8787 \begin_layout Subsection
8788 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8789 \begin_inset Index idx
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8793 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8801 \begin_layout Standard
8802 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8803 affected by nesting anyhow.
8807 \begin_layout Itemize
8811 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8819 \begin_layout Standard
8821 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8829 Figures and tables in
8833 are not affected by this.
8838 Have a look at section
8839 \begin_inset space ~
8843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8845 reference "sec:Floats"
8849 for more information about
8856 \begin_layout Standard
8858 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8859 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8864 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8872 of its own, it behaves just like a
8873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8880 paragraph environment.
8881 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 Here's an example with a table:
8889 \begin_layout Enumerate
8894 \begin_layout Enumerate
8895 This is (a) and it's nested.
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8900 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8908 \begin_inset Tabular
8909 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8910 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8912 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 \begin_layout Standard
8997 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9004 \begin_layout Enumerate
9006 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 \begin_layout Standard
9015 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9018 \begin_layout Enumerate
9023 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 This is (a) and it's nested.
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9035 \begin_layout Standard
9037 \begin_inset Tabular
9038 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9039 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 \begin_layout Standard
9126 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9132 \begin_layout Enumerate
9139 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9155 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 This is (a) and it's nested.
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9176 \begin_inset Tabular
9177 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9178 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 \begin_layout Standard
9266 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9272 \begin_layout Enumerate
9274 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9281 \begin_layout Enumerate
9285 \begin_layout Standard
9286 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9292 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9293 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9297 \begin_layout Subsection
9298 Usage and General Features
9301 \begin_layout Standard
9302 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9303 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9312 is the innermost possible depth.
9313 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9316 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 level #1 – outermost
9321 \begin_layout Enumerate
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Itemize
9341 \begin_layout Itemize
9350 \begin_layout Standard
9351 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9352 both of them in the example.
9353 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9363 For example, if we tried to nest another
9368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9375 , we would get errors.
9378 \begin_layout Subsection
9380 \begin_inset Index idx
9383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9392 \begin_layout Standard
9393 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9394 We have several examples of nested environments.
9395 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9400 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9403 \begin_layout Labeling
9404 \labelwidthstring MMM
9405 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9414 \begin_layout Labeling
9415 \labelwidthstring MMM
9416 #2-a This is level #2.
9417 We created it by using
9420 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9426 arg "depth-increment"
9433 \begin_layout Labeling
9434 \labelwidthstring MMM
9435 #3-a This is level #3.
9436 This time, we just enter
9443 arg "depth-increment"
9447 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9451 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9457 arg "depth-increment"
9464 \begin_layout Standard
9469 environment, nested inside of
9470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9478 So, it's at level #4.
9479 We did this by entering
9482 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9488 arg "depth-increment"
9491 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9496 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9512 \begin_layout Standard
9517 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9520 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9526 \begin_layout Labeling
9527 \labelwidthstring MMM
9528 #4-a This is level #4.
9532 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9535 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9540 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9544 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9549 keep nesting things inside
9550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9561 \begin_layout Labeling
9562 \labelwidthstring MMM
9563 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9568 \begin_layout Labeling
9569 \labelwidthstring MMM
9570 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9571 and this is level #6.
9572 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #5-b Back to level #5.
9582 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9588 arg "depth-decrement"
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9606 arg "depth-decrement"
9609 , we're back at level #4.
9613 \begin_layout Labeling
9614 \labelwidthstring MMM
9615 #3-b Back to level #3.
9616 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9620 \begin_layout Labeling
9621 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 #2-b Back to level #2.
9627 \begin_layout Labeling
9628 \labelwidthstring MMM
9629 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9630 After this sentence, we will enter
9634 and change the paragraph environment back to
9641 \begin_layout Standard
9642 We could have also used the
9658 environment in place of the
9663 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9667 Example 2: Inheritance
9670 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9671 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9674 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9683 arg "depth-increment"
9687 \begin_inset Newline newline
9690 which, we will change to the
9698 \begin_layout Enumerate
9703 environment, at level #2.
9706 \begin_layout Enumerate
9707 Notice how the nested
9711 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9715 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9719 \begin_layout Standard
9720 We ended this example by entering
9725 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9729 and reset the nesting depth by using
9732 arg "depth-decrement"
9738 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9739 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9748 \begin_inset Argument 1
9751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9752 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9760 \begin_layout Enumerate
9761 This is level #1, in an
9765 paragraph environment.
9766 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9775 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9781 arg "depth-increment"
9785 Now, what happens if we nest an
9789 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9790 label be? An asterisk?
9794 \begin_layout Itemize
9804 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9805 So, its label is a bullet.
9806 (We got here by using
9809 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9815 arg "depth-increment"
9818 , then changing the environment to
9826 \begin_layout Itemize
9827 Here's level #4, produced using
9830 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9836 arg "depth-increment"
9840 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9845 \begin_layout Enumerate
9848 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9853 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9857 , because we are in the
9865 environment (that is, it is an
9880 \begin_layout Enumerate
9885 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9886 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9891 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9894 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9897 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9904 arg "depth-decrement"
9907 to decrease the depth after the next
9910 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9919 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9924 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9927 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9931 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9941 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9946 reset the counter for the label.
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9960 arg "depth-decrement"
9963 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9964 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9965 into the twofold-nested
9973 \begin_layout Enumerate
9974 The same thing happens if we do another
9977 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9983 arg "depth-decrement"
9986 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9989 \begin_layout Standard
9990 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9995 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10006 The number of other
10010 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10017 The same rule applies for the
10021 environment, as well.
10024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10025 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10028 \begin_layout Enumerate
10029 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10030 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10031 the same detail with how we did it.
10040 \begin_layout Standard
10048 arg "depth-increment"
10055 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10056 the example in parentheses someplace.
10057 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10058 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10059 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10063 \begin_layout Enumerate
10068 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10072 \begin_layout Verse
10073 Now we will add verse.
10074 \begin_inset Newline newline
10077 It will get much worse.
10078 \begin_inset Newline newline
10088 arg "depth-increment"
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10118 \begin_layout Verse
10119 Here comes a table:
10123 \begin_layout Standard
10124 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10130 \begin_layout Standard
10132 \begin_inset Tabular
10133 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10134 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 \begin_layout Verse
10225 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10235 arg "depth-increment"
10241 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10247 \begin_inset Newline newline
10255 arg "depth-decrement"
10262 \begin_layout Enumerate
10267 : level #1) This is another item.
10268 Note that selecting a
10272 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10273 3 times to put the table inside the
10281 \begin_layout Quotation
10282 We're now ending the
10286 list and changing to
10291 We're still at level #1.
10292 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10293 The next set of paragraphs is a
10294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10301 We will nest both the
10308 \begin_inset space ~
10313 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10317 for the letter body.
10321 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10324 to preserve the depth.
10325 Remember that you need to use
10328 arg "newline-insert newline"
10331 to create multiple lines inside the
10338 \begin_inset space ~
10348 \begin_layout Right Address
10350 \begin_inset Newline newline
10353 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10354 \begin_inset Newline newline
10360 \begin_layout Address
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10368 \begin_layout Quotation
10369 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10373 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10374 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10375 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10376 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10377 as soon as possible.
10378 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10381 \begin_layout Quotation
10382 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10383 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10384 with your order, along with payment.
10387 \begin_layout Quotation
10388 We thank you again for your patience.
10391 \begin_layout Address
10393 \begin_inset Newline newline
10400 \begin_layout Quotation
10401 That ends that example!
10404 \begin_layout Standard
10405 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10406 gives you a lot of power with just
10408 We could have easily nested an
10429 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10432 \begin_layout Subsection
10434 \begin_inset Index idx
10437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10438 Nesting ! Separation
10444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10446 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10453 \begin_layout Standard
10454 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10456 For example you need two different enumerations:
10459 \begin_layout Enumerate
10464 \begin_layout Enumerate
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10473 \begin_layout Standard
10474 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10480 \begin_layout Itemize
10486 \begin_layout Standard
10487 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Enumerate
10501 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10506 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10507 list item and use the menu
10509 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10510 Start New Environment
10513 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10515 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10518 arg "paragraph-break"
10522 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10523 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10524 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10525 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10528 \begin_layout Standard
10529 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10532 arg "paragraph-break"
10535 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10538 \begin_layout Section
10539 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10540 \begin_inset Index idx
10543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10552 \begin_layout Standard
10553 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10554 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10556 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10557 be broken at the end of a line.
10558 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10562 \begin_layout Subsection
10564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10566 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10571 \begin_inset Index idx
10574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10583 \begin_layout Standard
10584 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10585 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10586 ) not to break the line at
10588 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10591 \begin_layout Quote
10592 Further documentation is given in section
10593 \begin_inset Newline newline
10597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10599 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10607 \begin_layout Standard
10608 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10623 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10632 A protected space is set with
10634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10635 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10637 \begin_inset space ~
10645 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10651 \begin_layout Subsection
10653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10655 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10660 \begin_inset Index idx
10663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10664 Spacing ! Horizontal
10672 \begin_layout Standard
10673 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10676 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10680 The length units are listed in Appendix
10681 \begin_inset space ~
10685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10687 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10694 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10698 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10703 \begin_inset Index idx
10706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10707 Spaces ! Inter-word
10715 \begin_layout Standard
10716 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10717 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10718 at the ends of sentences.
10719 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10720 automatically takes care about this.
10721 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10722 followed by a period; see section
10723 \begin_inset space ~
10727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10729 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10734 To insert a normal space, select
10736 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10737 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10739 \begin_inset space ~
10747 arg "space-insert normal"
10753 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10757 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10762 \begin_inset Index idx
10765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10774 \begin_layout Standard
10776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10783 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10792 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10793 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10794 inside abbreviations:
10797 \begin_layout Quote
10799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10803 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10806 \begin_layout Standard
10807 or between values and units.
10808 Compare for example this:
10809 \begin_inset Newline newline
10813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10817 \begin_inset Newline newline
10820 10 kg (normal space
10823 \begin_layout Standard
10824 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10826 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10827 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10829 \begin_inset space ~
10837 arg "space-insert thin"
10843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10847 \begin_layout Standard
10848 You can also insert the following space types:
10851 \begin_layout Description
10853 \begin_inset space ~
10857 \begin_inset space ~
10860 space A line with a
10861 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10865 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10869 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10872 negative thin space between the arrows.
10875 \begin_layout Description
10877 \begin_inset space ~
10881 \begin_inset space ~
10884 space A line with a
10885 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10889 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10896 negative medium space between the arrows.
10899 \begin_layout Description
10901 \begin_inset space ~
10905 \begin_inset space ~
10908 space A line with a
10909 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10913 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10920 negative thick space between the arrows.
10923 \begin_layout Description
10925 \begin_inset space ~
10929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10933 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10937 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10941 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10945 \begin_inset space ~
10949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10952 em) space between the arrows.
10955 \begin_layout Description
10957 \begin_inset space ~
10961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10965 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10969 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10973 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10977 \begin_inset space ~
10981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10984 em) space between the arrows.
10987 \begin_layout Description
10989 \begin_inset space ~
10993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10997 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11001 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11009 \begin_inset space ~
11013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11016 em) space between the arrows.
11019 \begin_layout Description
11021 \begin_inset space ~
11025 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11029 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11034 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11041 cm space between the arrows.
11044 \begin_layout Standard
11046 \begin_inset space ~
11050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11052 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11056 lists the different space sizes.
11059 \begin_layout Standard
11060 \begin_inset Float table
11065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11066 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11071 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11075 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11085 \begin_inset Tabular
11086 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11087 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11088 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11089 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11205 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11364 \begin_inset Index idx
11367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11376 \begin_layout Standard
11377 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11378 feature for adding extra space
11379 in a uniform fashion.
11380 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11381 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11382 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11383 equally between themselves.
11386 \begin_layout Standard
11387 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11390 \begin_layout Quote
11392 This is on the left side
11393 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11396 This is on the right
11399 \begin_layout Quote
11402 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11406 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11412 \begin_layout Quote
11415 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11419 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11429 \begin_layout Standard
11430 That was an example in the
11436 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11440 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11444 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11447 is one in a standard paragraph.
11448 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11452 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11455 \begin_layout Standard
11456 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11459 \begin_inset space ~
11464 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11467 \begin_layout Standard
11469 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11473 \begin_inset space ~
11479 \begin_layout Standard
11481 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11485 \begin_inset space ~
11491 \begin_layout Standard
11493 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11497 \begin_inset space ~
11503 \begin_layout Standard
11505 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11515 \begin_layout Standard
11517 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11521 \begin_inset space ~
11527 \begin_layout Standard
11529 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11533 \begin_inset space ~
11539 \begin_layout Standard
11540 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11548 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11552 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11554 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11555 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11559 option in the space dialog.
11567 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11571 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11576 \begin_inset Index idx
11579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11588 \begin_layout Standard
11589 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11590 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11593 \begin_layout Standard
11594 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11597 What is correct English?:
11598 \begin_inset Newline newline
11602 \begin_inset Newline newline
11606 \begin_inset space ~
11609 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11610 \begin_inset Newline newline
11614 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11625 \begin_inset Newline newline
11629 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11640 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11646 \begin_layout Standard
11648 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11653 \begin_inset space ~
11657 \begin_inset space ~
11661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11665 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11668 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11672 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11678 \begin_inset space ~
11682 \begin_inset space ~
11686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11689 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11698 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11699 That is why it is named
11700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11708 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11709 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11713 \begin_layout Subsection
11715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11717 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11722 \begin_inset Index idx
11725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11734 \begin_layout Standard
11735 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11738 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11740 \begin_inset space ~
11746 There you find the following sizes:
11749 \begin_layout Standard
11762 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11763 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11768 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11771 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11773 \begin_inset space ~
11779 \begin_inset Index idx
11782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11783 Document ! Settings
11788 for the paragraph separation.
11789 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11800 \begin_layout Standard
11806 \begin_inset Index idx
11809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11815 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11816 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11821 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11822 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11831 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11840 s are described in section
11841 \begin_inset space ~
11845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11847 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11856 If there are several
11860 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11861 You can therefore use
11865 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11868 \begin_layout Standard
11873 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11874 \begin_inset space ~
11878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11880 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11887 \begin_layout Standard
11888 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11898 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11899 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11911 \begin_layout Subsection
11912 Paragraph Alignment
11913 \begin_inset Index idx
11916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11917 Paragraph ! Alignment
11925 \begin_layout Standard
11926 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11928 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11931 dialog (toolbar button
11934 arg "layout-paragraph"
11938 There are five possibilities:
11941 \begin_layout Itemize
11949 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11955 \begin_layout Itemize
11963 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11969 \begin_layout Itemize
11977 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11983 \begin_layout Itemize
11991 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11997 \begin_layout Itemize
12005 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12011 \begin_layout Standard
12012 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12013 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12014 the left and right margins.
12015 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12018 \begin_layout Standard
12020 This paragraph is right aligned,
12023 \begin_layout Standard
12025 this one is centered,
12028 \begin_layout Standard
12030 this one is left aligned.
12033 \begin_layout Subsection
12035 \begin_inset Index idx
12038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12039 Page breaks ! Forced
12045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12047 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12055 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12056 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12057 force a page break where you want one.
12058 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12059 is good at page breaking.
12060 Only if you use a lot of
12064 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12065 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12068 \begin_layout Standard
12069 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12070 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12074 have to change the page breaking.
12077 \begin_layout Standard
12078 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12080 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12082 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12083 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12085 \begin_inset space ~
12091 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12094 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12096 \begin_inset space ~
12101 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12103 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12104 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12107 \begin_layout Standard
12108 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12109 at the top of a page.
12110 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12112 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12113 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12114 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12118 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12122 to learn more about
12129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12133 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12138 \begin_inset Index idx
12141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12142 Page breaks ! Clear
12150 \begin_layout Standard
12151 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12152 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12153 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12154 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12155 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12158 \begin_layout Standard
12159 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12161 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12162 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12164 \begin_inset space ~
12170 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12173 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12175 \begin_inset space ~
12179 \begin_inset space ~
12184 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12185 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12188 \begin_layout Subsection
12190 \begin_inset Index idx
12193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12202 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12209 \begin_layout Standard
12210 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12212 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12215 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12217 \begin_inset space ~
12221 \begin_inset space ~
12229 arg "newline-insert newline"
12233 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12236 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12238 \begin_inset space ~
12242 \begin_inset space ~
12250 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12253 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12255 This is useful to avoid
12256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12263 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12266 \begin_layout Standard
12267 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12268 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12270 very good at line breaking.
12271 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12272 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12273 \begin_inset space ~
12277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12279 reference "sec:Quote"
12284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12286 reference "sec:Verse"
12291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12293 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12300 \begin_layout Subsection
12302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12304 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12309 \begin_inset Index idx
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12321 \begin_layout Standard
12323 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12334 \begin_layout Standard
12338 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12339 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12341 \begin_inset space ~
12346 you can insert horizontal lines.
12347 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12348 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12349 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12354 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12365 \begin_layout Section
12366 Characters and Symbols
12369 \begin_layout Standard
12370 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12371 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12372 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12380 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12384 for information on how this is done.
12387 \begin_layout Standard
12388 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12393 dialog via the menu
12395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12396 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12402 \begin_layout Standard
12403 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12411 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12412 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12414 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12422 \begin_layout Section
12423 Fonts and Text Styles
12424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12426 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12433 \begin_layout Subsection
12435 \begin_inset Index idx
12438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12447 \begin_layout Standard
12448 There are two types of fonts:
12451 \begin_layout Description
12453 \begin_inset space ~
12457 \begin_inset Index idx
12460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12466 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12471 characters) in the font.
12472 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12473 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12474 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12475 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12476 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12477 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12478 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12479 \begin_inset Newline newline
12482 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12483 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12484 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12485 sizes than at small ones.
12486 \begin_inset Newline newline
12500 \begin_inset space ~
12508 \begin_layout Description
12510 \begin_inset space ~
12514 \begin_inset Index idx
12517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12523 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12524 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12525 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12526 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12527 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12528 image manipulation program.
12529 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12530 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12531 \begin_inset space ~
12534 pixels high up to 34
12535 \begin_inset space ~
12538 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12539 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12540 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12542 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12543 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12544 \begin_inset Newline newline
12547 Bitmap fonts are named
12550 \begin_inset space ~
12555 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12558 \begin_layout Standard
12559 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12560 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12561 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12562 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12563 use scalable fonts.
12566 \begin_layout Standard
12567 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12570 \begin_layout Standard
12571 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12572 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12573 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12574 font to emphasize text, you use an
12575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12583 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12585 In \SpecialChar LyX
12586 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12590 \begin_layout Subsection
12593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12595 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12602 \begin_layout Standard
12603 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12604 used its own fonts.
12605 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12606 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12609 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12610 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12611 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12612 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12613 to a word processor.
12614 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12615 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12616 files are very portable across
12617 different machines.
12618 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12619 has increased a lot
12620 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12623 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12625 \begin_inset space ~
12629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12631 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12636 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12637 code in the document
12638 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12641 \begin_layout Standard
12642 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12643 engines that are also able directly
12644 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12646 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12648 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12650 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12651 that is installed on your system.
12652 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12655 \begin_layout Standard
12656 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12664 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12665 es; so you might have to experiment.
12673 \begin_layout Subsection
12674 Document Font and Font size
12675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12677 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12682 \begin_inset Index idx
12685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12692 \begin_inset Index idx
12695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12704 \begin_layout Standard
12705 You can set the document fonts in the
12707 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12711 \begin_inset Index idx
12714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12715 Document ! Settings
12725 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12726 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12729 \begin_inset space ~
12738 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12740 \begin_inset space ~
12743 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12746 \begin_layout Standard
12751 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12752 This requires that you use
12764 as the output format, i.
12765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12769 \begin_inset space \space{}
12772 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12773 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12774 installed (see section
12775 \begin_inset space ~
12779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12781 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12786 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12788 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12789 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12791 \begin_inset space ~
12794 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12795 cannot determine the family.
12796 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12797 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12800 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12803 \begin_layout Standard
12804 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12805 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12810 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12816 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12817 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12825 \begin_inset space ~
12831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12844 European Computer Modern
12847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12854 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12857 \begin_layout Standard
12866 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12867 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12872 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12875 \begin_inset space ~
12880 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12886 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12887 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12890 \begin_layout Itemize
12894 \begin_inset space ~
12899 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12912 \begin_inset space ~
12917 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12918 community in order to replace
12922 as the default font.
12923 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12924 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12927 \begin_inset space ~
12940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12941 One difference is improved kerning.
12949 \begin_layout Itemize
12953 \begin_inset space ~
12957 \begin_inset space ~
12962 fonts in (the rare) case that
12965 \begin_inset space ~
12970 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12985 Virtual means that it
12986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12997 -glyphs from other fonts.
12998 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13020 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13026 \begin_inset Index idx
13029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13031 -packages ! aeguill
13036 with the document preamble line
13037 \begin_inset Newline newline
13044 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13045 \begin_inset Newline newline
13050 will fix the guillemet problem.
13055 and that accented characters are not
13059 glyph, but built of
13063 characters, the accent and the letter.
13064 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13070 If you search for example for the French word
13071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13078 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13087 and not for the glyph
13088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13092 \begin_inset space ~
13096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13102 \begin_layout Itemize
13103 If you do not like the look of
13111 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13116 \begin_inset space ~
13122 \begin_inset space ~
13132 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13133 \begin_inset space ~
13136 serif and typewriter fonts,
13140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13141 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13148 \begin_inset space ~
13157 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13162 \begin_inset space \space{}
13170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13174 \begin_inset space \space{}
13180 \begin_inset space ~
13188 \begin_inset space ~
13198 but you can also select your own.
13199 \begin_inset Newline newline
13202 The differences between roman,
13205 \begin_inset space ~
13214 fonts are explained in section
13215 \begin_inset space ~
13219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13221 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13226 \begin_inset Newline newline
13232 \begin_inset space ~
13237 was originally designed for newspapers.
13238 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13239 into the small newspaper columns.
13243 \begin_inset space ~
13248 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13251 \begin_layout Standard
13252 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13265 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13270 depends on the class you are using.
13271 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13274 \begin_layout Standard
13275 Note that the font size is the
13280 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13281 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13282 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13283 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13286 \begin_inset space ~
13292 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13293 \begin_inset space ~
13297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13299 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13306 \begin_layout Standard
13310 \begin_inset space ~
13315 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13320 serif or typewriter.
13325 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13335 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13338 \begin_layout Standard
13343 LaTeX font encoding
13345 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13346 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13352 \begin_inset Index idx
13355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13357 -packages ! fontenc
13363 \begin_inset space ~
13367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13369 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13374 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13375 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13382 \begin_layout Standard
13383 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13385 Use Old Style Figures
13389 Use True Small Caps
13392 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13395 Use Old Style Figures
13397 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13399 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13407 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13411 Use True Small Caps
13413 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13414 of scaled capitals.
13415 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13416 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13419 \begin_layout Standard
13424 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13425 a font to display the script characters.
13429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13430 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13436 \begin_inset Index idx
13439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13446 So this has no effect for the document language
13460 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13464 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13472 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13477 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13478 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13480 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13482 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13485 dialog, see section
13486 \begin_inset space ~
13490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13492 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13504 \begin_layout Subsection
13508 \begin_layout Standard
13509 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13510 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13512 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13513 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13514 choose a math font in the dialog
13516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13520 \begin_inset Index idx
13523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13524 Document ! Settings
13530 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13531 automatically selects a math font.
13532 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13533 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13542 \begin_inset space ~
13548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13553 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13554 document font is available.
13557 \begin_layout Standard
13558 Note that the math font will not be used for
13562 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13568 or by the insertion of the command
13575 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13576 \begin_inset space ~
13580 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13581 while the math characters do not.
13583 \begin_inset space ~
13586 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13589 \begin_inset space ~
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13602 in the document font settings.
13605 \begin_layout Standard
13606 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13607 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13608 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13609 font (in most cases
13610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13616 \begin_inset space ~
13622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13625 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13626 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13634 \begin_inset space ~
13640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13646 \begin_layout Subsection
13647 Using Different Character Styles
13648 \begin_inset Index idx
13651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13658 \begin_inset Index idx
13661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13670 \begin_layout Standard
13671 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13672 automatically changes the character style for certain
13673 paragraph environments.
13675 supports two character styles,
13684 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13688 \begin_layout Standard
13693 style, do one of the following:
13696 \begin_layout Itemize
13697 click on the toolbar button
13706 \begin_layout Itemize
13707 use the key binding
13716 \begin_layout Standard
13717 These commands are all toggles.
13722 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13725 \begin_layout Standard
13726 One typically uses the
13730 style for proper names.
13732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13739 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13747 \begin_layout Standard
13748 A more widely used character style is the
13753 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13760 \begin_layout Itemize
13761 clicking on the toolbar button
13770 \begin_layout Itemize
13771 using the keybindings
13780 \begin_layout Standard
13785 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13787 use a different font.
13790 \begin_layout Standard
13791 We've been using the
13795 style all over the place in this document.
13796 Here's one more example:
13799 \begin_layout Quotation
13802 Do not overuse character styles!
13805 \begin_layout Standard
13806 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13807 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13808 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13809 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13814 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13822 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13824 \begin_inset space ~
13827 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13833 arg "dialog-show character"
13839 \begin_layout Subsection
13840 Fine-Tuning with the
13845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13847 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13852 \begin_inset Index idx
13855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13864 \begin_layout Standard
13865 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13867 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13868 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13869 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13870 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13871 from ordinary dialog.
13874 \begin_layout Standard
13875 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13876 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13877 \begin_inset Newline newline
13880 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13881 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13884 \begin_layout Standard
13885 To use custom character styles, open the
13887 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13889 \begin_inset space ~
13892 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13895 dialog or press the toolbar button
13898 arg "dialog-show character"
13902 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13903 font property that you can choose.
13904 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13907 \begin_inset space ~
13912 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13917 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13918 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13919 environments all at once.
13922 \begin_layout Standard
13923 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13926 \begin_inset space ~
13938 \begin_layout Labeling
13939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13953 The possible options are:
13957 \begin_layout Labeling
13958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13963 This is the Roman font family.
13964 Normally a serif font.
13965 It's also the default family.
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13980 \begin_inset space ~
13987 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13999 \begin_layout Labeling
14000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14007 This is the Typewriter font family.
14013 arg "font-typewriter"
14022 \begin_layout Labeling
14023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14028 This corresponds to the print weight.
14033 \begin_layout Labeling
14034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14039 This is the Medium font series.
14040 It's also the default series.
14043 \begin_layout Labeling
14044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14051 This is the Bold font series.
14064 \begin_layout Labeling
14065 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14070 As the name implies.
14075 \begin_layout Labeling
14076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14081 This is the Upright font shape.
14082 It's also the default shape.
14085 \begin_layout Labeling
14086 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14100 s the Italic font shape
14106 \begin_layout Labeling
14107 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14114 This is the Slanted font shape
14116 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14117 , this is different from italic).
14120 \begin_layout Labeling
14121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14125 \begin_inset space ~
14132 This is the Small caps font shape
14139 \begin_layout Labeling
14140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14145 Alters the text color.
14146 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14150 \begin_inset space ~
14155 , which means that the document default color set in
14157 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14158 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14164 \begin_inset space ~
14169 is used, you can choose between
14246 \begin_inset Index idx
14249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14258 \begin_layout Labeling
14259 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14264 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14265 the language of the document.
14266 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14267 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14269 \begin_inset Newline newline
14272 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14274 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14275 When using the spell checking (see section
14276 \begin_inset space ~
14280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14282 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14286 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14289 \begin_layout Labeling
14290 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14295 Alters the size of the font.
14296 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14297 proportional to the document font size.
14298 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14299 the details, but a general description of what
14305 \begin_layout Labeling
14306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14327 arg "font-size tiny"
14333 \begin_layout Labeling
14334 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14355 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14361 \begin_layout Labeling
14362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14383 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14389 \begin_layout Labeling
14390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14411 arg "font-size small"
14417 \begin_layout Labeling
14418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14432 It's also the default size.
14436 arg "font-size normal"
14442 \begin_layout Labeling
14443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14464 arg "font-size large"
14470 \begin_layout Labeling
14471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14492 arg "font-size larger"
14498 \begin_layout Labeling
14499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14520 arg "font-size largest"
14526 \begin_layout Labeling
14527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14548 arg "font-size huge"
14554 \begin_layout Labeling
14555 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14576 arg "font-size giant"
14582 \begin_layout Labeling
14583 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14588 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14608 arg "font-size increase"
14614 \begin_layout Labeling
14615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14620 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14640 arg "font-size decrease"
14647 \begin_layout Standard
14652 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14653 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14655 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14656 — use those instead.
14657 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14660 \begin_layout Labeling
14661 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14666 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14671 \begin_layout Labeling
14672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14679 This is text with emphasize on
14682 This might seem like the same as
14686 , but it is actually a bit different.
14692 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14694 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14697 \begin_layout Labeling
14698 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14705 This is text with Underbar on.
14711 arg "font-underline"
14717 \begin_inset Newline newline
14722 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14723 when you could not change fonts.
14724 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14725 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14726 because some people
14730 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14733 \begin_layout Labeling
14734 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14738 \begin_inset space ~
14745 This is text with Double underbar on.
14751 arg "font-underunderline"
14755 \begin_inset Newline newline
14758 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14759 about double underbar.
14762 \begin_layout Labeling
14763 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14767 \begin_inset space ~
14774 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14780 arg "font-underwave"
14784 \begin_inset Newline newline
14787 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14788 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14791 \begin_layout Labeling
14792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14799 This is text with Strikeout on.
14805 arg "font-strikeout"
14809 \begin_inset Newline newline
14812 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14813 changed in the meantime.
14816 \begin_layout Labeling
14817 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14824 This is text with Noun on.
14831 , this is a logical attribute.
14832 Normally it's equivalent to
14835 \begin_inset space ~
14844 \begin_layout Standard
14845 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14846 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14848 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14850 \begin_inset space ~
14853 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14859 arg "dialog-show character"
14862 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14863 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14866 arg "textstyle-apply"
14870 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14874 \begin_layout Standard
14875 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14882 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14883 (suppose you just set the shape to
14884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14902 \begin_inset space ~
14914 \begin_layout Standard
14915 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14923 \begin_inset space ~
14935 \begin_layout Itemize
14941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14948 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 \begin_inset Newline newline
14970 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14984 \begin_inset Note Note
14987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14988 For more on phantoms see section
14989 \begin_inset space ~
14993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14995 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15005 \begin_inset Newline newline
15011 \begin_layout Itemize
15016 fonts use characters with serifs.
15017 These are the small
15018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15025 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15026 The following example shows the difference:
15027 \begin_inset Newline newline
15031 \begin_inset Newline newline
15036 text without serifs
15039 \begin_inset Newline newline
15042 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15043 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15050 \begin_layout Itemize
15055 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15056 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15057 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15060 \begin_layout Standard
15061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15068 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15069 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15072 \begin_inset space ~
15077 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15078 the property to be removed.
15079 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15080 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15081 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15099 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15100 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15108 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15112 \begin_inset space ~
15117 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15128 If you, for example, set
15129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15147 \begin_inset space ~
15152 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15161 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15164 \begin_layout Standard
15165 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15166 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15169 \begin_layout Section
15170 Printing and Previewing
15173 \begin_layout Subsection
15177 \begin_layout Standard
15178 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15179 using \SpecialChar LyX
15180 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15181 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15182 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15183 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15185 Additional Features
15190 \begin_layout Standard
15192 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15195 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15196 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15197 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15200 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15201 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15202 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15203 to turn your writing into printable output.
15204 This happens in two stages:
15207 \begin_layout Enumerate
15208 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15209 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15211 a file with the extension,
15212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15226 \begin_layout Enumerate
15227 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15228 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15229 to use the commands in the
15233 file to produce printable output.
15236 \begin_layout Subsection
15237 Output file formats
15238 \begin_inset Index idx
15241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15250 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15258 Simple text (ASCII)
15259 \begin_inset Index idx
15262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15263 File formats ! ASCII
15271 \begin_layout Standard
15272 This file type has the extension
15273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15285 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15289 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15296 \begin_layout Standard
15297 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15299 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15300 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15302 \begin_inset space ~
15308 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15309 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15310 bibliography (section
15311 \begin_inset space ~
15315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15317 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15322 If your document includes such material, use
15324 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15325 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15327 \begin_inset space ~
15331 \begin_inset space ~
15335 \begin_inset space ~
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15347 \begin_inset space ~
15353 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15354 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15357 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15360 \begin_inset Index idx
15363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15364 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15373 \begin_layout Standard
15374 This file type has the extension
15375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15386 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15389 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15390 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15391 -Errors or to process it manually
15392 with console commands.
15393 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15394 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15395 's temporary directory whenever you
15396 view or export your document.
15399 \begin_layout Standard
15400 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15401 -file using the menu
15403 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15404 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15408 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 export variants are explained in section
15410 \begin_inset space ~
15414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15416 reference "subsec:Export"
15423 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15425 \begin_inset Index idx
15428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15437 \begin_layout Standard
15438 This file type has the extension
15439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15459 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15460 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15461 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15465 \begin_layout Standard
15466 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15467 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15468 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15469 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15470 when you view the DVI.
15471 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15474 \begin_layout Standard
15475 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15477 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15478 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15483 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15484 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15486 \begin_inset space ~
15492 The latter option uses the program
15494 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15500 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15503 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15504 font access (see section
15505 \begin_inset space ~
15509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15511 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15516 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15517 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15524 \begin_inset Index idx
15527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15528 File formats ! PostScript
15536 \begin_layout Standard
15537 This file type has the extension
15538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15550 PostScript was developed by the company
15554 as a printer language.
15555 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15557 PostScript can be seen as a
15558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15561 programming language
15562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15565 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15570 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15577 \begin_inset Index idx
15580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15582 -packages ! pstricks
15592 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15595 \begin_layout Standard
15596 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15600 Encapsulated PostScript
15601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15604 (EPS, file extension
15605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15617 As \SpecialChar LyX
15618 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15619 convert them in the background to EPS.
15620 If, for example, you have 50
15621 \begin_inset space ~
15624 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15626 \begin_inset space ~
15629 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15630 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15632 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15633 EPS to avoid this problem.
15636 \begin_layout Standard
15637 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15639 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15640 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15646 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15648 \begin_inset Index idx
15651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15658 \begin_inset Index idx
15661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15670 \begin_layout Standard
15671 This file type has the extension
15672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 Portable Document Format
15689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15696 was derived from PostScript.
15697 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15706 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15707 looks exactly the same.
15710 \begin_layout Standard
15711 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15715 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15719 (JPG, file extension
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15747 Portable Network Graphics
15748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15751 (PNG, file extension
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15764 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15765 converts them in the
15766 background to one of these formats.
15767 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15768 will slow down your workflow.
15769 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15772 \begin_layout Standard
15773 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15775 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15781 \begin_layout Description
15783 \begin_inset space ~
15786 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15790 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15793 \begin_layout Description
15795 \begin_inset space ~
15802 ) This uses the program
15804 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15807 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15810 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15813 is a new engine, derived from
15817 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15818 access (see section
15819 \begin_inset space ~
15823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15825 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15830 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15831 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15836 \begin_layout Description
15838 \begin_inset space ~
15845 ) This uses the program
15850 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15856 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15857 font access (see section
15858 \begin_inset space ~
15862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15864 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15869 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15870 vertically written Japanese.
15873 \begin_layout Description
15875 \begin_inset space ~
15878 (cropped) This is the same as
15881 \begin_inset space ~
15886 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15887 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15888 to generate good-looking
15889 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15892 \begin_layout Description
15894 \begin_inset space ~
15897 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15901 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15905 \begin_layout Description
15907 \begin_inset space ~
15910 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15914 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15915 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15919 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15920 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15923 \begin_layout Standard
15927 \begin_inset space ~
15936 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15937 works without problems.
15938 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15939 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15943 \begin_inset space ~
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15956 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15966 \begin_inset Index idx
15969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15970 FileFormats ! XHTML
15976 \begin_inset Index idx
15979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15988 \begin_layout Standard
15989 This file type has the extension
15990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16002 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16003 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16004 When \SpecialChar LyX
16005 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16006 suitable for the purpose.
16007 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16009 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16010 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16013 between different formats, which are described in section
16015 Math Output in XHTML
16020 \begin_inset space ~
16028 \begin_layout Standard
16029 XHTML output remains
16030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16037 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16038 features are supported yet.
16042 and the World Wide Web
16046 Additional Features
16048 manual, for more information.
16051 \begin_layout Standard
16052 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16054 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16055 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16061 \begin_layout Subsection
16063 \begin_inset Index idx
16066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16075 \begin_layout Standard
16076 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16077 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16086 or use the toolbar button
16093 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16094 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
16095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16101 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16105 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16113 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16118 Further output formats can be selected via
16120 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16121 View (Other Formats)
16123 or the toolbar button
16132 \begin_layout Standard
16133 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16134 viewer window using the menu
16136 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16142 Update (Other Formats)
16147 \begin_layout Standard
16148 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16151 To have a real output, export your document.
16154 \begin_layout Section
16155 A few Words about Typography
16156 \begin_inset Index idx
16159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16168 \begin_layout Subsection
16169 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16170 \begin_inset Index idx
16173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16180 \begin_inset Index idx
16183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16192 \begin_layout Standard
16193 In \SpecialChar LyX
16195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16206 character comes in four lengths: the
16218 , and the minus sign:
16219 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16225 \begin_layout Standard
16226 \begin_inset Tabular
16227 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16228 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16229 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16230 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16231 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16232 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16261 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16301 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16328 \begin_inset space ~
16331 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16338 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16365 \begin_inset space ~
16368 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16389 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16423 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16429 \begin_layout Standard
16430 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16442 character multiple times in a row.
16443 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16444 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16477 \begin_layout Standard
16478 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16479 math mode and has a length of its own.
16480 Here are some examples:
16483 \begin_layout Enumerate
16484 line- and page-breaks
16485 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16495 \begin_layout Enumerate
16497 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16507 \begin_layout Enumerate
16508 Oh — there's a dash.
16509 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16519 \begin_layout Enumerate
16520 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16524 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16534 \begin_layout Subsection
16536 \begin_inset Index idx
16539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16548 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16555 \begin_layout Standard
16556 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16557 but automatically in the output.
16558 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16564 \begin_inset Index idx
16567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16574 following the rules of the document language.
16577 \begin_layout Standard
16579 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16583 font and with unusual constructs, like
16584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16592 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16593 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16594 This is done with the menu
16596 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16597 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16599 \begin_inset space ~
16605 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16607 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16611 \begin_layout Standard
16612 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16613 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16624 would then see the hyphen
16625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16632 as a hyphenation possibility.
16633 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16634 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16635 as described in section
16637 Prevent Hyphenation
16642 \begin_inset space ~
16650 \begin_layout Subsection
16652 \begin_inset Index idx
16655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16665 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16668 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16675 \begin_layout Standard
16676 When \SpecialChar LyX
16677 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16678 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16680 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16686 appropriate amount of space.
16687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16690 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16692 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16693 gets after another word.
16696 \begin_layout Standard
16697 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16698 not work in all cases.
16700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16711 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16712 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16715 \begin_layout Standard
16716 Here are some examples of
16720 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16723 \begin_layout Itemize
16728 \begin_layout Itemize
16733 \begin_layout Standard
16734 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16737 \begin_layout Itemize
16739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16743 this is too much space!
16746 \begin_layout Itemize
16751 \begin_layout Standard
16752 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16755 \begin_layout Standard
16756 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16759 \begin_layout Enumerate
16763 \begin_inset space ~
16768 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16769 \begin_inset space ~
16773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16775 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16780 \begin_inset Index idx
16783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16784 Spaces ! inter-word
16792 \begin_layout Enumerate
16796 \begin_inset space ~
16801 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16802 \begin_inset space ~
16806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16808 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16813 \begin_inset Index idx
16816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16825 \begin_layout Enumerate
16829 \begin_inset space ~
16833 \begin_inset space ~
16837 \begin_inset space ~
16844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16846 \begin_inset space ~
16851 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16852 This function is also bound to
16855 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16861 \begin_layout Standard
16862 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16865 \begin_layout Itemize
16867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16871 \begin_inset space \space{}
16874 this is too much space!
16877 \begin_layout Itemize
16878 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16882 \begin_layout Standard
16883 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16884 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16886 will take care of this.
16889 \begin_layout Standard
16890 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16894 \begin_inset space ~
16900 feature described in the section
16902 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16907 Additional Features
16912 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16914 \begin_inset Index idx
16917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16918 Typography ! Quotes
16924 \begin_inset Index idx
16927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16958 \begin_layout Standard
16960 usually sets quotes correctly.
16961 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16962 and use a closing quote at the end.
16964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16972 The keyboard character,
16976 , generates this automatically.
16979 \begin_layout Standard
16980 You can specify what character the
16984 key produces using the submenu
16990 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16994 \begin_inset Index idx
16997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16998 Document ! Settings
17008 There are six choices:
17011 \begin_layout Labeling
17012 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17035 \begin_layout Labeling
17036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17039 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17043 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17049 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17053 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17059 \begin_layout Labeling
17060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17063 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17067 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17073 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17077 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17083 \begin_layout Labeling
17084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17087 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17091 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17097 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17101 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17107 \begin_layout Labeling
17108 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17111 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17115 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17121 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17125 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17131 \begin_layout Labeling
17132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17135 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17139 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17145 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17149 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17155 \begin_layout Standard
17156 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17159 arg "quote-insert single"
17165 \begin_layout Subsection
17167 \begin_inset Index idx
17170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17171 Typography ! Ligatures
17177 \begin_inset Index idx
17180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17211 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17218 \begin_layout Standard
17219 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17220 print them as single characters.
17221 These groups are known as
17226 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17227 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17229 Here are the standard ligatures:
17232 \begin_layout Itemize
17236 \begin_layout Itemize
17240 \begin_layout Itemize
17244 \begin_layout Itemize
17248 \begin_layout Itemize
17252 \begin_layout Standard
17253 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17256 \begin_layout Standard
17257 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17258 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17266 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17282 To break a ligature, use
17284 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17285 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17287 \begin_inset space ~
17294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17305 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17322 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17330 \begin_layout Subsection
17332 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17334 \begin_inset Index idx
17337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17347 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17354 \begin_layout Standard
17357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17358 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17362 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17365 \begin_layout Description
17367 The name of the game.
17370 \begin_layout Description
17372 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17376 \begin_layout Description
17378 The \SpecialChar TeX
17379 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17383 \begin_layout Description
17384 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17385 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17389 \begin_layout Standard
17390 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17396 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17404 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17405 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17406 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17407 converges to the number
17408 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17411 : The actual version is
17412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17420 , the previous one was
17421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17432 \begin_layout Subsection
17434 \begin_inset Index idx
17437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17446 \begin_layout Standard
17447 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17448 space between two words.
17449 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17459 for units use the menu
17461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17462 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17464 \begin_inset space ~
17472 arg "space-insert thin"
17478 \begin_layout Standard
17479 Here is an example to show the differences:
17482 \begin_layout Standard
17483 \begin_inset Tabular
17484 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17485 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17486 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17487 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17494 \begin_inset space ~
17498 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17510 space between number and unit
17517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17526 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17538 half space between number and unit
17551 \begin_layout Subsection
17553 \begin_inset Index idx
17556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17557 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17565 \begin_layout Standard
17566 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17568 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17569 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17570 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17571 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17572 These bits of text became known as
17583 \begin_layout Standard
17584 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17585 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17586 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17587 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17588 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17589 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17590 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17591 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17592 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17593 \begin_inset Newline newline
17601 \begin_inset Newline newline
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17612 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17613 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17614 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17616 \begin_inset space ~
17620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17622 key "latexcompanion"
17627 \begin_inset space ~
17631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17637 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17638 's page break mechanism.
17641 \begin_layout Chapter
17642 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17645 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17652 \begin_layout Standard
17653 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17656 \begin_inset space ~
17662 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17665 \begin_layout Section
17667 \begin_inset Index idx
17670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17686 \begin_layout Standard
17688 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17691 \begin_layout Description
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17697 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17698 \begin_inset Newline newline
17702 \begin_inset Note Note
17705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17706 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17714 \begin_layout Description
17715 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17716 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17717 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17720 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17721 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17723 \begin_inset space ~
17729 \begin_inset Newline newline
17733 \begin_inset Note Comment
17736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17737 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17746 \begin_layout Description
17748 \begin_inset space ~
17751 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17752 set in the document settings under
17754 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17756 \begin_inset space ~
17762 \begin_inset Newline newline
17766 \begin_inset Newline newline
17770 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17780 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17785 of a comment that appears in the output.
17791 \begin_inset Newline newline
17795 \begin_inset Newline newline
17798 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17801 \begin_layout Standard
17802 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17814 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17817 \begin_layout Section
17819 \begin_inset Index idx
17822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17831 name "sec:Footnotes"
17838 \begin_layout Standard
17840 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17846 or the toolbar button
17849 arg "footnote-insert"
17861 \begin_inset Graphics
17862 filename clipart/footnote.png
17871 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17872 's representation of your footnote.
17882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17901 label, the box will
17905 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17906 Clicking on the box label again will close
17919 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17920 and click on the footnote
17935 \begin_layout Standard
17936 Here is an example footnote:
17944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17945 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17953 \begin_layout Standard
17954 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17955 position where the footnote box is placed.
17956 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17957 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17958 according to the document class.
17960 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17961 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17967 ey are described in the
17970 \begin_inset space ~
17978 \begin_layout Section
17980 \begin_inset Index idx
17983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17992 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17999 \begin_layout Standard
18000 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18002 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18011 or the toolbar button
18014 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18040 appearing within your text.
18041 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18042 's representation of your margin
18051 \begin_layout Standard
18052 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18056 \begin_inset Marginal
18059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18061 This is a marginal note.
18069 \begin_layout Standard
18070 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18071 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18072 pages, right on odd pages.
18075 \begin_layout Standard
18076 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18079 \begin_inset space ~
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_layout Section
18096 Graphics and Images
18097 \begin_inset Index idx
18100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18107 \begin_inset Index idx
18110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18119 name "sec:Graphics"
18126 \begin_layout Standard
18127 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18128 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18131 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18136 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18140 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18143 \begin_layout Standard
18144 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18149 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18150 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18152 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18153 \begin_inset space ~
18157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18159 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18166 \begin_layout Standard
18171 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18172 of the image in the output.
18173 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18177 \begin_inset space ~
18181 \begin_inset space ~
18190 \begin_inset space ~
18194 \begin_inset space ~
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18203 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18204 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18212 \begin_layout Standard
18216 \begin_inset space ~
18220 \begin_inset space ~
18225 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18226 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18228 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18233 \begin_inset space ~
18238 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18239 with the image size is printed.
18242 \begin_layout Standard
18243 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18244 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18246 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18251 \begin_inset Graphics
18252 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18260 \begin_layout Standard
18261 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18262 the image into a float, see section
18263 \begin_inset space ~
18267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18269 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18276 \begin_layout Subsection
18278 \begin_inset Index idx
18281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18290 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18297 \begin_layout Standard
18298 You can insert images in any known file format.
18299 But as we explained in section
18300 \begin_inset space ~
18304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18306 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18310 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18312 therefore uses the program
18316 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18317 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18318 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18319 \begin_inset space ~
18323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18325 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18332 \begin_layout Standard
18333 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18336 \begin_layout Description
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18341 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18342 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18343 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18347 Graphics Interchange Format
18348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18351 (GIF, file extension
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18364 \begin_inset Index idx
18367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18399 Portable Network Graphics
18400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18403 (PNG, file extension
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18416 \begin_inset Index idx
18419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18451 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18455 (JPG, file extension
18456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18480 \begin_inset Index idx
18483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18514 \begin_layout Description
18516 \begin_inset space ~
18519 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18521 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18522 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18523 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18524 \begin_inset Newline newline
18527 Scalable image formats can be
18528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18531 Scalable Vector Graphics
18532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18535 (SVG, file extension
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18548 \begin_inset Index idx
18551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18583 Encapsulated PostScript
18584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18587 (EPS, file extension
18588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18600 \begin_inset Index idx
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18635 Portable Document Format
18636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18639 (PDF, file extension
18640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18652 \begin_inset Index idx
18655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18670 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18671 result will not be scalable.
18672 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18678 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18686 \begin_layout Standard
18687 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18694 \begin_layout Subsection
18695 Grouping of Image Settings
18696 \begin_inset Index idx
18699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18700 Images ! Settings grouping
18708 \begin_layout Standard
18709 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18711 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18712 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18714 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18715 need to manually change each of them.
18719 \begin_layout Standard
18720 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18723 \begin_inset space ~
18727 \begin_inset space ~
18739 \begin_inset space ~
18743 \begin_inset space ~
18749 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18750 and checking the name of the desired group.
18753 \begin_layout Section
18755 \begin_inset Index idx
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18774 \begin_layout Standard
18775 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18778 arg "tabular-insert"
18783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18787 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18788 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18789 from the rest of the table.
18790 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18791 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18793 Here is an example table:
18796 \begin_layout Standard
18798 \begin_inset Tabular
18799 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18800 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18801 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18802 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18803 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18804 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19004 \begin_layout Subsection
19008 \begin_layout Standard
19009 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19012 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19016 This brings up the table dialog.
19017 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19018 cursor is placed currently.
19019 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19020 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19021 done on all of your selection.
19024 \begin_layout Standard
19025 In addition to the table dialog, the
19028 \begin_inset space ~
19033 helps you in setting table properties.
19034 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19037 \begin_layout Standard
19041 \begin_inset space ~
19046 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19047 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19048 current cell respectively.
19049 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19051 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19052 of text, see section
19053 \begin_inset space ~
19057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19059 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19066 \begin_layout Standard
19067 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19068 using the check box
19077 This will merge the cells to
19081 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19082 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19083 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19084 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19085 in the last row without the upper border:
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19090 \begin_inset Tabular
19091 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19092 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19093 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19094 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19095 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19107 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19116 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19192 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19227 \begin_layout Standard
19228 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19229 -arguments for the table.
19230 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19231 explained in the chapter
19238 \begin_inset space ~
19244 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19245 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19246 but are visible in the output.
19249 \begin_layout Standard
19250 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19258 Most DVI-viewers are
19262 able to display rotations.
19270 \begin_layout Standard
19275 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19280 adds lines for all cell borders.
19283 \begin_layout Subsection
19285 \begin_inset Index idx
19288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19289 Tables ! Longtables
19295 \begin_inset Index idx
19298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19307 \begin_layout Standard
19308 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_inset space ~
19324 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19325 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19328 \begin_layout Description
19333 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19334 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19335 except for the first page, if
19338 \begin_inset space ~
19346 \begin_layout Description
19350 \begin_inset space ~
19355 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19356 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19359 \begin_layout Description
19364 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19365 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19366 except for the last page, if
19369 \begin_inset space ~
19377 \begin_layout Description
19381 \begin_inset space ~
19386 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19387 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19390 \begin_layout Description
19391 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19392 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19398 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19401 \begin_inset space ~
19409 \begin_layout Standard
19410 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19411 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19412 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19418 In this context, first means first in this order:
19421 \begin_inset space ~
19433 \begin_inset space ~
19438 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19441 \begin_layout Standard
19443 \begin_inset Tabular
19444 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19445 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19446 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19447 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19448 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19449 <row endfirsthead="true">
19450 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19456 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19461 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19470 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19480 <row endfirsthead="true">
19481 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19513 <row endhead="true">
19514 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19534 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19544 <row endhead="true">
19545 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19556 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19577 <row endfoot="true">
19578 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19589 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19598 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19629 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20570 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20579 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20588 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20599 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20847 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20971 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21064 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21157 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21467 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21559 <row endlastfoot="true">
21560 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21571 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 \begin_layout Subsection
21599 \begin_inset Index idx
21602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21611 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21618 \begin_layout Standard
21619 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21620 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21621 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21622 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21626 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21629 \begin_layout Standard
21630 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21631 for the column in the table dialog.
21632 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21633 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21637 \begin_layout Standard
21639 \begin_inset Tabular
21640 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21641 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21643 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21664 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21789 This is longer now.
21794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21845 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21846 This is longer now.
21851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 \begin_layout Standard
21878 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21879 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21884 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21885 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21891 Selection with the mouse or with
21895 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21896 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21897 the selection from outside the table.
21900 \begin_layout Section
21902 \begin_inset Index idx
21905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21921 \begin_layout Subsection
21925 \begin_layout Standard
21926 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21927 have a fixed location.
21929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21936 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21944 \begin_inset space ~
21949 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21950 too many notes on the current page.
21953 \begin_layout Standard
21954 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21955 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21956 and pages without text.
21957 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21958 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21959 Floats are therefore numbered.
21960 Referencing is described in section
21961 \begin_inset space ~
21965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21967 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21974 \begin_layout Standard
21975 To insert a float, use the menu
21977 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21981 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21982 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21984 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21985 \begin_inset Index idx
21988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21995 paragraph within the float.
21996 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21997 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21998 left-clicking on the box label.
21999 A closed float box looks like this:
22000 \begin_inset Graphics
22001 filename clipart/float.png
22006 – a gray button with a red label.
22009 \begin_layout Standard
22010 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22012 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22015 \begin_layout Subsection
22017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22019 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22024 \begin_inset Index idx
22027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 Floats ! Figure floats
22036 \begin_layout Standard
22038 \begin_inset space ~
22042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22044 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22048 was created using the menu
22050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22051 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22057 arg "float-insert figure"
22061 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22064 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22070 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22074 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22075 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22077 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22079 \begin_inset space ~
22087 arg "layout-paragraph"
22093 \begin_layout Standard
22094 \begin_inset Float figure
22099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22101 \begin_inset Graphics
22102 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22112 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22117 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22121 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22134 \begin_layout Standard
22135 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22136 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22147 ) and refer to it using the menu
22149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22155 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22159 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22160 vague references like
22161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22168 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22169 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22179 For more about cross-references, see section
22180 \begin_inset space ~
22184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22186 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22193 \begin_layout Standard
22194 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22195 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22196 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22197 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22198 as described in section
22199 \begin_inset space ~
22203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22205 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22211 \begin_inset space ~
22215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22217 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22221 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22222 You can also set the images one below the other.
22224 \begin_inset space ~
22228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22230 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22237 reference "fig:Platypus"
22241 are the subfigures.
22244 \begin_layout Standard
22245 \begin_inset Float figure
22250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22255 \begin_inset Float figure
22260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22261 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22266 name "fig:Undefinable"
22278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22279 \begin_inset Graphics
22280 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22291 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22295 \begin_inset Float figure
22300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22301 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22306 name "fig:Platypus"
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22319 \begin_inset Graphics
22320 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22332 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22339 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22344 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22348 Two distorted images.
22361 \begin_layout Subsection
22363 \begin_inset Index idx
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22367 Floats ! Table floats
22375 \begin_layout Standard
22376 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22379 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22382 or the toolbar button
22385 arg "float-insert table"
22389 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22390 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22391 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22393 \begin_inset space ~
22397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22399 reference "tab:Table-float"
22406 \begin_layout Standard
22407 \begin_inset Float table
22412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22418 name "tab:Table-float"
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 \begin_inset Tabular
22433 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22434 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22435 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22436 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22437 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22564 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22585 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22588 \end{array}\right]$
22596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22609 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22630 \begin_layout Subsection
22632 \begin_inset Index idx
22635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 \begin_layout Standard
22646 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22647 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22648 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22650 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22658 \begin_inset space ~
22666 \begin_layout Section
22668 \begin_inset Index idx
22671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22680 \begin_layout Standard
22682 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22684 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22685 \begin_inset space \space{}
22692 \begin_layout Standard
22693 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22694 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22700 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22701 and its alignment within the page.
22704 \begin_layout Standard
22706 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22716 height_special "totalheight"
22721 backgroundcolor "none"
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 This is a minipage.
22728 The text is set in an italic style.
22731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22734 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22735 another formatting.
22743 \begin_layout Standard
22744 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22747 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22751 as described in section
22752 \begin_inset space ~
22756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22758 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22763 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22769 \begin_layout Standard
22770 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22780 height_special "totalheight"
22785 backgroundcolor "none"
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22790 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22796 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22800 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22810 height_special "totalheight"
22815 backgroundcolor "none"
22818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22819 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22820 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22828 \begin_layout Standard
22829 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22835 \begin_layout Standard
22836 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22838 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22845 \begin_inset space ~
22853 \begin_layout Chapter
22854 Mathematical Formulas
22855 \begin_inset Index idx
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22865 \begin_inset Index idx
22868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22899 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22906 \begin_layout Standard
22907 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22912 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22915 \begin_layout Section
22917 \begin_inset Index idx
22920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22929 \begin_layout Standard
22930 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22943 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22945 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22946 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22947 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22955 \begin_layout Standard
22956 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22960 \begin_inset space ~
22965 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22968 \begin_layout Standard
22969 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22970 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22973 \begin_layout Standard
22974 This is a line with an inline formula
22975 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22981 \begin_layout Standard
22982 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22983 paragraph, like this one:
22984 \begin_inset Formula
22991 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22994 \begin_layout Standard
22996 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22998 For example, typing
22999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23012 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23013 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23017 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23020 \begin_inset space ~
23028 \begin_layout Subsection
23029 Navigating in Formulas
23030 \begin_inset Index idx
23033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23042 \begin_layout Standard
23043 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23044 achieved with the arrow keys.
23046 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23047 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23052 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23053 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23057 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23061 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23064 \end{array}\right]$
23072 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23077 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23078 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23081 \begin_layout Standard
23086 , printed in this document as
23087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23091 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23098 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23099 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23100 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23105 For example, if you want
23106 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23114 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23124 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23128 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23133 , since in the latter case only the
23136 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23141 will be under the square root sign:
23142 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23148 \begin_layout Standard
23149 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23151 \begin_inset Formula
23153 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23162 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23163 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23166 \begin_layout Subsection
23170 \begin_layout Standard
23171 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23172 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23176 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23177 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23178 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23179 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23180 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23184 \begin_layout Subsection
23185 Exponents and Subscripts
23186 \begin_inset Index idx
23189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23196 \begin_inset Index idx
23199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23208 \begin_layout Standard
23209 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23212 arg "math-superscript"
23218 arg "math-subscript"
23221 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23223 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23226 , type in a formula
23229 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23239 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23245 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23249 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23255 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23261 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23270 , you have to use an extra
23274 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23275 For example, if you want
23276 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23282 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23288 Subscripts are similar: To get
23289 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23295 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23303 \begin_layout Subsection
23305 \begin_inset Index idx
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23317 \begin_layout Standard
23318 Create a fraction either with the command
23324 or by using the icon
23327 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23333 \begin_inset space ~
23339 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23340 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23341 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23346 To move back up, press
23351 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23352 \begin_inset Formula
23354 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23357 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23365 \begin_layout Subsection
23367 \begin_inset Index idx
23370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23379 \begin_layout Standard
23380 Roots can be created using the
23383 \begin_inset space ~
23391 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23397 arg "math-insert \\root"
23419 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23425 always produces a square root.
23428 \begin_layout Subsection
23429 Operators with Limits
23430 \begin_inset Index idx
23433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 \begin_inset Index idx
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23452 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23459 \begin_layout Standard
23461 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23465 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23468 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23469 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23470 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23471 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23472 The sum operator will automatically place its
23473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23480 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23482 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23486 \begin_inset Formula
23488 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23493 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23497 \begin_layout Standard
23498 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23500 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23501 behind the operator and using the menu
23503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23504 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23506 \begin_inset space ~
23510 \begin_inset space ~
23524 \begin_layout Standard
23525 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23534 \begin_inset Index idx
23537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23544 \begin_inset Formula
23546 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23551 which will place the
23552 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23564 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23565 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23571 \begin_layout Standard
23572 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23579 Have a look at section
23580 \begin_inset space ~
23584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23586 reference "subsec:Functions"
23590 for an explanation of function macros.
23593 \begin_layout Subsection
23595 \begin_inset Index idx
23598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23607 \begin_layout Standard
23608 Most math symbols can be found in the
23611 \begin_inset space ~
23616 under one of several categories; including
23633 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23637 \begin_layout Standard
23638 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23639 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23640 don't have to use the
23643 \begin_inset space ~
23648 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23650 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23653 \begin_layout Subsection
23655 \begin_inset Index idx
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 \begin_layout Standard
23668 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23674 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23680 \begin_inset space ~
23688 arg "math-insert \\space"
23692 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23693 For example, the sequence
23698 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23701 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23703 \begin_inset Graphics
23704 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23709 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23710 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23711 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23712 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23713 , because they are negative
23715 Here are two examples:
23718 \begin_layout Standard
23728 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23734 \begin_layout Standard
23744 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23750 \begin_layout Subsection
23752 \begin_inset Index idx
23755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23764 name "subsec:Functions"
23771 \begin_layout Standard
23775 \begin_inset space ~
23780 contains under the button
23783 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23786 a number of function macros, such as
23787 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23791 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23799 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23806 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23807 avoid confusions, because
23808 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23812 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23818 \begin_layout Standard
23819 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23821 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23825 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23831 \begin_layout Standard
23832 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23833 are placed, as described in section
23834 \begin_inset space ~
23838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23840 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23847 \begin_layout Subsection
23849 \begin_inset Index idx
23852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23861 \begin_layout Standard
23862 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23864 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23865 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23866 commands, for example, to enter
23867 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23870 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23871 Our example is entered by typing
23876 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23883 \begin_inset space ~
23887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23889 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23893 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23896 \begin_layout Standard
23897 \begin_inset Float table
23902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23908 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23912 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23922 \begin_inset Tabular
23923 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23924 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23925 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23926 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23927 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24011 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24065 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24119 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24227 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24281 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24389 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24443 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24488 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24509 \begin_layout Standard
24510 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24513 \begin_inset space ~
24521 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24524 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24528 \begin_layout Section
24529 Brackets and Delimiters
24530 \begin_inset Index idx
24533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24540 \begin_inset Index idx
24543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24552 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24559 \begin_layout Standard
24560 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24562 For some purposes, using just the keys
24567 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24568 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24569 toolbar delimiter icon
24572 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24576 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24577 \begin_inset Formula
24579 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24587 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24588 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24592 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24595 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24601 \begin_inset Formula
24603 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24611 \begin_layout Standard
24612 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24613 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24617 \begin_layout Standard
24618 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24619 left side and right side.
24620 If you use the option
24623 \begin_inset space ~
24628 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24629 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24631 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24636 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24637 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24640 \begin_layout Standard
24641 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24642 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24643 is to go inside the brackets.
24644 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24649 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24650 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24651 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24655 arg "math-delim ( )"
24661 \begin_layout Section
24662 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24663 \begin_inset Index idx
24666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24673 \begin_inset Index idx
24676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24683 \begin_inset Index idx
24686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24687 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24695 \begin_layout Standard
24696 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24700 \begin_inset space ~
24708 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24712 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24713 Here is an example:
24714 \begin_inset Formula
24716 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24725 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24726 \begin_inset space ~
24730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24732 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24737 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24738 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24739 This alignment is set in the box
24744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24793 for every column as default.
24794 For example, the sequence
24795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24806 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24807 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24808 corresponds to the relevant column.
24809 The result will look like this:
24810 \begin_inset Formula
24813 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24814 column & has & has\,right\\
24815 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24824 \begin_layout Standard
24825 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24828 arg "newline-insert newline"
24831 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24832 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24834 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24837 or the math toolbar.
24840 \begin_layout Standard
24841 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24842 It can be created with the menu
24844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24845 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24847 \begin_inset space ~
24859 Here is an example:
24860 \begin_inset Formula
24874 \begin_layout Standard
24875 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24878 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24881 arg "newline-insert newline"
24885 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24890 arg "newline-insert newline"
24893 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24901 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24902 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24903 A new row is created by every further entry of
24906 arg "newline-insert newline"
24910 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24911 Here is an example:
24912 \begin_inset Formula
24914 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24915 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24920 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24921 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24922 \begin_inset Formula
24924 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24932 \begin_layout Standard
24933 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24940 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24941 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24944 reference "eq:asquared"
24949 The other types are described in section
24950 \begin_inset space ~
24954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24956 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24963 \begin_layout Section
24964 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24965 \begin_inset Index idx
24968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24969 Math ! Formula numbering
24975 \begin_inset Index idx
24978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 Math ! Referencing formulas
24985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24987 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24994 \begin_layout Standard
24995 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24997 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24998 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25000 \begin_inset space ~
25004 \begin_inset space ~
25012 arg "math-number-toggle"
25016 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25017 within parentheses.
25018 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25019 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25020 the document class.
25021 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25022 separated by a dot:
25023 \begin_inset Formula
25033 arg "math-number-toggle"
25036 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25037 You can only number displayed formulas.
25040 \begin_layout Standard
25041 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25043 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25044 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25046 \begin_inset space ~
25050 \begin_inset space ~
25058 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25061 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25062 \begin_inset Formula
25065 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25071 To number all lines use the shortcut
25074 arg "math-number-toggle"
25080 \begin_layout Standard
25081 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25084 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25085 A label is inserted with the menu
25087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25096 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25097 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25098 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25110 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25111 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25112 We inserted in the following example the label
25113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25120 in the second line:
25121 \begin_inset Formula
25123 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25124 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25129 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25130 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25131 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25133 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25135 \begin_inset space ~
25143 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25147 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25148 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25149 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25150 as the formula number:
25153 \begin_layout Standard
25154 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25157 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25164 \begin_layout Standard
25165 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25166 's cross-reference box are described in section
25167 \begin_inset space ~
25171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25173 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25178 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25186 \begin_layout Section
25187 User defined math macros
25188 \begin_inset Index idx
25191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25200 \begin_layout Standard
25202 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25203 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25204 Math macros are explained in section
25207 \begin_inset space ~
25219 \begin_layout Section
25223 \begin_layout Subsection
25225 \begin_inset Index idx
25228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25237 \begin_layout Standard
25238 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25239 To set a font in a formula, use the
25242 \begin_inset space ~
25250 arg "math-insert \\font"
25253 , or enter its command, listed in table
25254 \begin_inset space ~
25258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25260 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25267 \begin_layout Standard
25268 \begin_inset Float table
25273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25274 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25279 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25283 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25293 \begin_inset Tabular
25294 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25295 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25296 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25297 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25329 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25356 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25383 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25416 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25443 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25470 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25504 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25565 \begin_layout Standard
25566 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25574 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25590 \begin_layout Standard
25591 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25592 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25597 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25598 space when you need a space in the box.
25599 Here is an example where
25600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25611 denotes the set of numbers:
25612 \begin_inset Formula
25614 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25622 \begin_layout Standard
25623 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25624 You can, for example, put a character in
25633 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25637 \begin_inset Newline newline
25640 So it is better not to use this feature.
25643 \begin_layout Standard
25644 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25645 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25649 \begin_inset Newline newline
25652 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25658 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25659 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25665 \begin_layout Standard
25672 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25675 \begin_layout Standard
25676 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25678 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25679 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25681 \begin_inset space ~
25689 \begin_layout Subsection
25691 \begin_inset Index idx
25694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25703 \begin_layout Standard
25704 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25706 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25710 \begin_inset space ~
25714 \begin_inset space ~
25722 \begin_inset space ~
25730 arg "math-insert \\font"
25734 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25735 in black instead of blue.
25736 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25737 Here is an example:
25738 \begin_inset Formula
25741 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25742 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25751 \begin_layout Subsection
25753 \begin_inset Index idx
25756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25765 \begin_layout Standard
25766 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25767 automatically chosen in most situations.
25785 For most characters,
25793 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25794 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25799 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25800 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25801 thinks are appropriate.
25802 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25805 arg "math-insert \\style"
25809 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25810 For example, you can set
25811 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25814 , which is normally in
25823 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25827 The four styles are used in the following example:
25830 \begin_layout Standard
25831 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25835 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25839 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25843 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25849 \begin_layout Standard
25850 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25851 is set in a particular size with the menu
25853 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25855 \begin_inset space ~
25860 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25861 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25862 will be adjusted to correspond.
25863 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25874 \begin_layout Standard
25878 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25884 \begin_layout Section
25885 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25887 \begin_inset Index idx
25890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25897 \begin_inset Index idx
25900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25909 \begin_layout Standard
25911 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25912 that are in common use.
25915 \begin_layout Subsection
25916 Enabling AMS-Support
25919 \begin_layout Standard
25920 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25921 the document by selecting the checkbox
25924 \begin_inset space ~
25928 \begin_inset space ~
25932 \begin_inset space ~
25939 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25943 \begin_inset Index idx
25946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25947 Document ! Settings
25955 \begin_inset space ~
25961 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25962 -errors in formulas,
25963 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25966 \begin_layout Subsection
25968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25970 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25975 \begin_inset Index idx
25978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25979 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25987 \begin_layout Standard
25988 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25989 provides a selection of different formula types.
25991 allows you to choose between
26012 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26013 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26019 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26022 \begin_layout Chapter
26026 \begin_layout Section
26028 \begin_inset Index idx
26031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26040 name "sec:Cross-References"
26047 \begin_layout Standard
26048 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26049 's strengths is cross-references.
26050 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26052 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26053 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26054 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26057 \begin_layout Enumerate
26061 \begin_layout Enumerate
26062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26064 name "enu:Second-item"
26071 \begin_layout Enumerate
26075 \begin_layout Standard
26076 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26081 or by pressing the toolbar button
26088 A gray label box like this:
26089 \begin_inset Graphics
26090 filename clipart/label.png
26095 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26097 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26132 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26133 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26149 \begin_layout Standard
26150 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26152 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26155 or the toolbar button
26158 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26162 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26163 \begin_inset Graphics
26164 filename clipart/reference.png
26169 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26171 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26184 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26188 \begin_layout Standard
26189 As an alternative to
26191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26194 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26199 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26200 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26202 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26214 \begin_layout Standard
26215 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26216 \begin_inset space ~
26220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26222 reference "enu:Second-item"
26229 \begin_layout Standard
26230 It is recommended to use a protected space
26234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26235 described in section
26236 \begin_inset space ~
26240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26242 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26251 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26252 line breaks between them.
26255 \begin_layout Standard
26256 There are six formats of cross-references:
26259 \begin_layout Description
26260 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26263 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26270 \begin_layout Description
26271 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26272 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26284 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26291 \begin_layout Description
26292 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26293 \begin_inset space ~
26297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26298 LatexCommand pageref
26299 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26306 \begin_layout Description
26308 \begin_inset space ~
26312 \begin_inset space ~
26315 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26317 LatexCommand vpageref
26318 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26323 \begin_inset Newline newline
26326 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26327 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26328 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26329 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26330 it prints “on the next page”.
26331 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26334 \begin_layout Description
26336 \begin_inset space ~
26340 \begin_inset space ~
26344 \begin_inset space ~
26347 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26350 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26355 \begin_inset Newline newline
26358 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26364 ; otherwise it behaves like
26368 \begin_inset space ~
26372 \begin_inset space ~
26381 \begin_layout Description
26383 \begin_inset space ~
26386 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26387 \begin_inset Newline newline
26391 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26399 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26409 \begin_inset Index idx
26412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26414 -packages ! prettyref
26420 \begin_inset Index idx
26423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26425 -packages ! refstyle
26436 \begin_inset Newline newline
26439 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26440 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26443 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26447 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26448 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26456 is the default and preferred because
26460 supports only English documents.
26461 The format is specified by using the command
26473 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26474 preamble of the document.
26475 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26488 ) can be done with this command
26489 \begin_inset Newline newline
26496 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26501 \begin_inset Newline newline
26504 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26506 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26508 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26515 \begin_layout Description
26517 \begin_inset space ~
26520 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26522 LatexCommand nameref
26523 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26530 \begin_layout Standard
26531 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26532 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26534 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26538 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26542 \begin_layout Standard
26543 You can only use the style
26547 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26551 is always possible.
26554 \begin_layout Standard
26555 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26556 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26558 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26559 \begin_inset space ~
26563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26565 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26572 \begin_layout Standard
26573 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26577 \begin_inset space ~
26581 \begin_inset space ~
26586 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26587 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26590 \begin_inset space ~
26595 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26596 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26599 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26605 \begin_layout Standard
26606 You can change labels at any time.
26607 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26608 do not need to think about this.
26611 \begin_layout Standard
26612 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26614 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26618 \begin_layout Standard
26619 References are described in detail in the section
26620 \begin_inset space ~
26630 \begin_inset space ~
26638 \begin_layout Section
26639 Table of Contents and other Listings
26640 \begin_inset Index idx
26643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26650 \begin_inset Index idx
26653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26654 Navigating ! Outline
26660 \begin_inset Index idx
26663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26679 \begin_layout Subsection
26681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26683 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26690 \begin_layout Standard
26691 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26694 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26696 \begin_inset space ~
26700 \begin_inset space ~
26706 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26708 If you click on it, the
26712 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26713 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26714 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26716 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26718 \begin_inset space ~
26723 that is described in section
26724 \begin_inset space ~
26728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26730 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26737 \begin_layout Standard
26738 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26739 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26741 \begin_inset space ~
26745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26747 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26751 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26753 \begin_inset space ~
26757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26759 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26763 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26765 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26768 \begin_layout Subsection
26769 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26772 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26779 \begin_layout Standard
26780 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26782 You can insert them via the
26784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26788 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26791 \begin_layout Section
26792 URLs and Hyperlinks
26793 \begin_inset Index idx
26796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26803 \begin_inset Index idx
26806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26815 \begin_layout Subsection
26817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26826 \begin_layout Standard
26827 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26835 \begin_layout Standard
26836 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26838 \begin_inset Flex URL
26841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26851 \begin_layout Standard
26852 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26858 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26862 \begin_layout Standard
26863 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26871 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26880 \begin_layout Subsection
26882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26884 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26891 \begin_layout Standard
26892 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26897 or with the toolbar button
26904 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26913 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26914 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26915 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26917 name "LyX's homepage"
26918 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26922 , an Email address like this:
26923 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26925 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26926 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26931 , or a link to a file.
26934 \begin_layout Standard
26935 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26948 to the link target.
26951 \begin_layout Standard
26952 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26953 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26954 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26955 the text style dialog.
26956 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26960 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26962 name "LyX's homepage"
26963 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26970 \begin_layout Standard
26971 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26975 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26978 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26982 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26984 \begin_inset Newline newline
26992 \begin_inset Newline newline
26999 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27002 \begin_layout Section
27004 \begin_inset Index idx
27007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27016 name "sec:Appendices"
27023 \begin_layout Standard
27024 Appendices are created with the menu
27026 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27028 \begin_inset space ~
27032 \begin_inset space ~
27038 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27039 as the appendix part of the book.
27040 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27043 \begin_layout Standard
27044 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27045 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27046 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27047 and the subsection number.
27048 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27052 \begin_layout Standard
27054 \begin_inset space ~
27058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27060 reference "chap:Credits"
27065 \begin_inset space ~
27069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27071 reference "subsec:Export"
27078 \begin_layout Section
27080 \begin_inset Index idx
27083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27092 name "sec:Bibliography"
27099 \begin_layout Standard
27100 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27102 You can include a bibliography database,
27106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27107 Known under the name
27108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27111 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27121 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27122 manually, using the paragraph environment
27126 , which was described in section
27127 \begin_inset space ~
27131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27133 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27138 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27139 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27143 use a bibliography database.
27146 \begin_layout Subsection
27147 The Bibliography Environment
27150 \begin_layout Standard
27155 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27157 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27166 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27168 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27178 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27181 \begin_layout Standard
27182 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27184 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27187 or the toolbar button
27190 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27194 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27195 containing the available citations.
27196 Select one or more keys from the list and
27206 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27207 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27211 \begin_layout Standard
27212 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27213 entry with surrounding brackets.
27218 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27219 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27231 \begin_layout Standard
27235 Companion Second Edition
27238 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27240 key "latexcompanion"
27247 \begin_layout Standard
27248 The \SpecialChar LyX
27249 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27250 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27259 \begin_layout Standard
27260 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27263 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27265 \begin_inset space ~
27273 arg "layout-paragraph"
27277 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27280 \begin_layout Subsection
27281 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27283 \begin_inset Index idx
27286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27287 Bibliography ! Databases
27293 \begin_inset Index idx
27296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27297 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27306 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27313 \begin_layout Standard
27314 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27320 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27322 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27323 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27328 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27330 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27331 your working field in a database.
27332 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27333 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27334 list for that document.
27335 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27339 \begin_layout Standard
27340 The database is a text file with the file extension
27341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27352 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27353 The format is explained in
27354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27360 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27364 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27369 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27370 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27371 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27373 \begin_inset Flex URL
27376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27378 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27386 \begin_layout Standard
27387 To use a database, use the menu
27389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27394 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27396 \begin_inset space ~
27402 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27403 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27410 Add bibliography to TOC
27412 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27417 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27418 in the document or just the cited references.
27421 \begin_layout Standard
27422 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27434 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27435 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27436 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27437 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27439 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27445 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27446 \begin_inset Newline newline
27450 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27452 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27464 \begin_layout Standard
27465 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27468 \begin_layout Standard
27469 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27470 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27472 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27479 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27480 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27485 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27486 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27491 The following variants are possible:
27494 \begin_layout Description
27495 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27496 with other bibliography packages (e.
27497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27501 \begin_inset space \space{}
27508 ), only with the package
27512 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27516 \begin_layout Description
27517 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27518 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27519 with all bibliography packages, except
27524 \begin_layout Description
27525 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27530 , works with all bibliography packages
27533 \begin_layout Standard
27534 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27535 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27537 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27540 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27544 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27553 \begin_layout Standard
27554 When you select the option
27556 Sectioned bibliography
27560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27561 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27564 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27565 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27567 Customizing Bibliographies
27571 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27576 Additional Features
27581 \begin_layout Standard
27582 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27583 the two methods of creating them.
27584 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27585 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27586 We used the style file
27590 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27593 \begin_layout Subsection
27595 \begin_inset Index idx
27598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27599 Bibliography ! Citation format
27607 \begin_layout Standard
27608 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27609 For this feature you need to enable the option
27615 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27619 \begin_inset Index idx
27622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27623 Document ! Settings
27633 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27634 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27635 style files as explained in
27636 the previous section.
27639 \begin_layout Standard
27640 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27641 the citation reference window.
27642 Here is an example where the text
27643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27647 \begin_inset space ~
27651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27654 appears after the reference:
27657 \begin_layout Standard
27659 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27662 key "latexcompanion"
27669 \begin_layout Section
27671 \begin_inset Index idx
27674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27690 \begin_layout Standard
27691 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27695 \begin_inset space ~
27700 or the toolbar button
27707 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27708 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27709 by \SpecialChar LyX
27710 as the index entry.
27713 \begin_layout Standard
27714 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27717 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27719 \begin_inset space ~
27725 A light blue box labeled
27726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27737 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27738 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27742 \begin_layout Standard
27743 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27744 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27745 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27746 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27748 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27750 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27757 \begin_layout Subsection
27758 Grouping Index Entries
27759 \begin_inset Index idx
27762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27771 \begin_layout Standard
27772 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27774 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27775 lists under the entry
27776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27784 First we create the entry
27785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27793 \begin_inset space ~
27797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27799 reference "subsec:Lists"
27804 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27805 \begin_inset space ~
27809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27811 reference "sec:Itemize"
27815 , we insert the command
27818 \begin_layout Standard
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27828 \begin_layout Standard
27834 \begin_layout Standard
27835 for the enumerated list in section
27836 \begin_inset space ~
27840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27842 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27849 \begin_layout Standard
27850 The exclamation mark
27851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27858 marks the grouping levels.
27859 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27860 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27861 If we don't have an index entry for
27862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27869 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27872 \begin_layout Subsection
27874 \begin_inset Index idx
27877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27878 Index ! Page ranges
27886 \begin_layout Standard
27887 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27889 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27890 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27891 an index entry in section
27892 \begin_inset space ~
27896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27898 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27905 \begin_layout Standard
27908 Paragraph environments|(
27911 \begin_layout Standard
27912 and another entry at the end of section
27913 \begin_inset space ~
27917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27919 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27926 \begin_layout Standard
27929 Paragraph environments|)
27932 \begin_layout Standard
27934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27957 respectively start and end the index range.
27958 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27959 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27960 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27961 An example is the index entry
27962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27965 Document ! Settings
27966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27972 \begin_layout Subsection
27974 \begin_inset Index idx
27977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27978 Index ! Cross referencing
27986 \begin_layout Standard
27987 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27988 We referred for example in the index entry
27989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27997 \begin_inset space ~
28001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28003 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28007 ) to the index entry
28008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28015 in the same section using the entry
28018 \begin_layout Standard
28021 GIF|see{Image formats}
28024 \begin_layout Standard
28025 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28027 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28028 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28031 \begin_layout Subsection
28033 \begin_inset Index idx
28036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28037 Index ! Entry order
28045 \begin_layout Standard
28046 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28047 follow the rules for the index order.
28048 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28054 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28056 \begin_inset space ~
28060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28062 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28071 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28072 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28097 \begin_inset Index idx
28100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28101 Dummy entries ! maïs
28107 \begin_inset Index idx
28110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28111 Dummy entries ! maître
28117 \begin_inset Index idx
28120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28121 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28126 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28127 maïs, maison, maître.
28128 To achieve this, we use the command
28131 \begin_layout Standard
28134 previous entry@current entry
28137 \begin_layout Standard
28138 In our case we want to have
28139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28154 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28157 \begin_layout Standard
28163 \begin_layout Standard
28164 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28165 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28167 See the next subsection for an example.
28170 \begin_layout Standard
28171 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28177 \begin_layout Standard
28178 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28183 to generate the index (see sec.
28184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28190 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28199 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28200 -package aeguill in sec.
28201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28207 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28211 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28212 -packages although all these index
28213 commands start with
28214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28227 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28232 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28235 \begin_layout Standard
28247 \begin_layout Standard
28259 \begin_layout Subsection
28261 \begin_inset Index idx
28264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28265 Index ! Entry layout
28273 \begin_layout Standard
28274 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28275 \begin_inset Index idx
28278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28281 This is an italic dummy entry
28286 You can also format the page number using the character
28287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28294 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28295 -command without a backslash.
28296 We can write for example
28299 \begin_layout Standard
28302 italic page number:|textit
28305 \begin_layout Standard
28306 to get the page number in italic.
28307 \begin_inset Index idx
28310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28311 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28316 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28317 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28335 \begin_inset space ~
28341 Have a look at section
28342 \begin_inset space ~
28346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28348 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28352 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28356 \begin_layout Standard
28357 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28365 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28369 to generate the index, see sec.
28370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28376 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28385 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28390 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28391 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28394 key "latexcompanion"
28406 \begin_layout Standard
28407 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28409 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28410 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28411 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28412 If so, put the following in the preamble
28415 \begin_layout Standard
28427 \begin_layout Standard
28431 \begin_layout Standard
28437 \begin_layout Standard
28438 in the index entry.
28439 \begin_inset Index idx
28442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28443 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28448 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28449 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28450 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28453 \begin_layout Standard
28454 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28455 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28456 a bold font for all index entries.
28457 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28469 documentation for details,
28470 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28472 key "makeindex,xindy"
28479 \begin_layout Subsection
28481 \begin_inset Index idx
28484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28493 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28500 \begin_layout Standard
28501 If the index generation program
28505 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28506 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28510 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28511 distribution, is used.
28515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28520 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28521 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28522 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28523 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28524 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28534 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28536 dialog, see section
28537 \begin_inset space ~
28541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28543 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28548 The available options are listed and explained in
28549 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28551 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28556 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28560 \begin_layout Standard
28561 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28562 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28566 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28570 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28571 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28574 \begin_layout Subsection
28578 \begin_layout Standard
28579 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28580 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28588 next to the standard index.
28590 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28591 that add this feature.
28598 \begin_inset Index idx
28601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28603 -packages ! splitidx
28608 package to generate multiple indexes.
28609 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28615 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28617 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28624 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28625 style, but it also includes
28626 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28627 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28635 \begin_layout Standard
28636 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28637 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28640 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28643 and select the option
28645 Use multiple Indexes
28652 already contains the standard index
28653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28661 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28662 also appear as a heading) to the
28666 input field and press the
28671 The new index now also appears in the list.
28672 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28673 label color to the new index.
28676 \begin_layout Standard
28677 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28687 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28688 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28689 are additional features:
28692 \begin_layout Itemize
28693 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28694 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28697 \begin_layout Itemize
28698 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28699 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28707 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28708 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28709 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28710 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28713 \begin_layout Section
28714 Nomenclature/Glossary
28715 \begin_inset Index idx
28718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28725 \begin_inset Index idx
28728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28759 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28766 \begin_layout Standard
28767 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28768 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28769 called nomenclature or glossary.
28772 \begin_layout Standard
28773 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28780 \begin_inset Index idx
28783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28785 -packages ! nomencl
28791 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28799 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28803 \begin_layout Standard
28804 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28805 and then use the menu
28807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28813 \begin_inset space ~
28818 or the toolbar button
28821 arg "nomencl-insert"
28826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28837 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28840 \begin_layout Standard
28841 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28842 The first is the term or
28846 that you wish to define.
28851 of the term or symbol.
28854 \begin_layout Standard
28855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28863 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28864 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28872 \begin_layout Subsection
28873 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28874 \begin_inset Index idx
28877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28878 Nomenclature ! Layout
28886 \begin_layout Standard
28887 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28891 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28898 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28906 \begin_inset Newline newline
28914 \begin_inset Newline newline
28920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28927 character starts/ends the formula.
28928 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28929 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28941 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28951 \begin_layout Standard
28952 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28953 -syntax is given in section
28954 \begin_inset space ~
28958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28960 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28967 \begin_layout Standard
28971 \begin_inset space ~
28976 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28978 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28983 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28990 in this document is:
28991 \begin_inset Newline newline
28996 dummy entry for the character
29001 \begin_inset Newline newline
29013 \begin_inset space ~
29023 font use the command
29052 \begin_layout Standard
29053 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29058 \begin_inset space \space{}
29062 \begin_inset Newline newline
29078 \begin_inset Newline newline
29081 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29082 This command will make the font of all symbols
29089 \begin_inset space ~
29097 \begin_layout Standard
29098 If the characters |
29099 \begin_inset space \space{}
29103 \begin_inset space \space{}
29107 \begin_inset space \space{}
29111 \begin_inset space \space{}
29115 \begin_inset space \space{}
29118 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29119 a quote character in front of them.
29120 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29121 LatexCommand nomenclature
29122 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29123 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29130 \begin_layout Subsection
29131 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29132 \begin_inset Index idx
29135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29136 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29144 \begin_layout Standard
29145 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29146 -code of the symbol
29148 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29150 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29153 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29154 LatexCommand nomenclature
29156 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29163 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29167 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29168 LatexCommand nomenclature
29171 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29176 They will be sorted by
29177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29203 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29206 will be sorted before the
29210 since the character
29211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29218 is considered in sorting.
29221 \begin_layout Standard
29222 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29225 \begin_inset space ~
29230 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29231 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29233 For the example given, you can insert
29237 in this field for the
29238 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29245 will be located before
29246 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29252 \begin_layout Standard
29253 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29258 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29267 \begin_layout Subsection
29268 Nomenclature Options
29269 \begin_inset Index idx
29272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29273 Nomenclature ! Options
29281 \begin_layout Standard
29286 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29287 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29290 \begin_layout Description
29291 refeq Appends the phrase
29292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29307 to every nomenclature entry, where
29313 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29316 \begin_layout Description
29317 refpage Appends the phrase
29318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29333 to every nomenclature entry, where
29339 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29342 \begin_layout Description
29343 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29346 \begin_layout Standard
29347 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29348 class options list in the
29350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29354 In this document the options
29361 \begin_layout Standard
29362 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29368 \begin_layout Standard
29369 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29370 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29375 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29378 \begin_layout Description
29388 \begin_layout Description
29391 nomrefpage Like the
29398 \begin_layout Description
29401 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29410 \begin_layout Description
29414 \begin_inset space ~
29420 \begin_inset space ~
29425 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29428 \begin_layout Standard
29430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29437 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29438 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29442 \begin_layout Standard
29450 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29453 \begin_inset Newline newline
29460 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29465 \begin_inset Newline newline
29469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29484 by their translation.
29487 \begin_layout Subsection
29488 Printing the Nomenclature
29489 \begin_inset Index idx
29492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29493 Nomenclature ! Printing
29501 \begin_layout Standard
29502 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29505 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29521 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29522 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29523 You can choose between these settings:
29526 \begin_layout Description
29527 Default a space of 1
29528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29534 \begin_layout Description
29536 \begin_inset space ~
29540 \begin_inset space ~
29543 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29546 \begin_layout Description
29547 Custom custom space
29550 \begin_layout Standard
29551 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29560 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29568 For example, in order to change the name to
29572 , add the following line to the preamble:
29575 \begin_layout Standard
29583 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29586 \begin_layout Subsection
29587 Nomenclature Program
29588 \begin_inset Index idx
29591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29592 Nomenclature ! Program
29598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29600 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29607 \begin_layout Standard
29613 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29614 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29616 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29621 by adding options, see section
29622 \begin_inset space ~
29626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29628 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29633 The available options are listed and explained in
29634 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29636 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29643 \begin_layout Section
29645 \begin_inset Index idx
29648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29655 \begin_inset Index idx
29658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29659 Document ! Branches
29665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29667 name "sec:Branches"
29674 \begin_layout Standard
29675 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29676 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29677 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29678 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29681 \begin_layout Standard
29682 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29683 allows you to put text into branches.
29684 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29685 To create a branch, either select the menu
29687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29688 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29691 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29693 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29700 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29701 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29702 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29703 and whether the name of the branch should
29704 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29705 (see below for an example).
29706 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29707 to the name of the other) and to add
29708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29720 \begin_inset space ~
29723 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29724 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29727 \begin_layout Standard
29728 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29729 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29734 where you can choose a branch.
29735 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29739 \begin_layout Standard
29740 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29741 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29744 \begin_layout Standard
29745 \begin_inset Branch Question
29748 \begin_layout Standard
29749 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29757 \begin_layout Standard
29758 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29761 \begin_layout Standard
29762 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29770 \begin_layout Standard
29777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29778 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29781 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29782 Consider for example a file
29783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29790 which has the above branches.
29792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29799 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29823 branch were inactive,
29824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29839 branch was active, likewise
29840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29855 branch was active, and
29856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29859 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29863 if both branches were active.
29864 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29867 \begin_layout Standard
29868 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29874 \begin_layout Standard
29875 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29876 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29877 definitions for each branch.
29878 For example you can define for the question branch
29882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29883 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29884 -syntax, see section
29885 \begin_inset space ~
29889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29891 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29903 \begin_layout Standard
29913 \begin_layout Standard
29923 \begin_layout Standard
29924 and for the answer branch
29927 \begin_layout Standard
29937 \begin_layout Standard
29947 \begin_layout Standard
29948 \begin_inset Branch Question
29951 \begin_layout Standard
29955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29983 \begin_layout Standard
29984 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29987 \begin_layout Standard
29991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30019 \begin_layout Standard
30020 Now it is possible to use the
30024 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30031 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30034 commands to obtain conditional output.
30035 Here is an example formula where only the
30042 \begin_inset Formula
30044 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30052 \begin_layout Standard
30053 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30061 \begin_layout Standard
30062 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30068 \begin_inset space \space{}
30071 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30073 For this advanced usage, see the
30079 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30084 \begin_layout Section
30086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30088 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30093 \begin_inset Index idx
30096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30105 \begin_layout Standard
30108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30109 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30112 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30114 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30120 \begin_inset Index idx
30123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30125 -packages ! hyperref
30130 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30131 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30132 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30133 part of the document.
30137 \begin_layout Standard
30138 The header information in the dialog tab
30142 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30143 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30144 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30145 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30149 \begin_inset space ~
30153 \begin_inset space ~
30158 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30159 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30160 and author entries.
30164 \begin_inset space ~
30168 \begin_inset space ~
30172 \begin_inset space ~
30177 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30180 \begin_layout Standard
30181 You can specify in the dialog tab
30185 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30190 \begin_inset space ~
30194 \begin_inset space ~
30198 \begin_inset space ~
30203 option allows long links to be split;
30206 \begin_inset space ~
30210 \begin_inset space ~
30214 \begin_inset space ~
30222 \begin_inset space ~
30227 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30230 \begin_inset space ~
30235 colors the different links.
30236 The default colors are:
30239 \begin_layout Labeling
30240 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30245 for hyperlinks and URLs
30248 \begin_layout Labeling
30249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30257 \begin_layout Labeling
30258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30266 \begin_layout Standard
30267 but you can change these in the field
30272 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30275 \begin_layout Standard
30278 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30281 \begin_layout Standard
30286 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30287 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30288 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30291 \begin_layout Standard
30296 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30297 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30298 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30308 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30309 when opening the PDF.
30311 \begin_inset space ~
30314 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30315 \begin_inset space ~
30318 1 will only display the sections.
30321 \begin_layout Standard
30322 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30323 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30329 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30330 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30339 \begin_layout Section
30341 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30345 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30352 \begin_layout Subsection
30355 \begin_inset Index idx
30358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30368 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30375 \begin_layout Standard
30376 As \SpecialChar LyX
30377 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30378 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30379 commands and constructs,
30382 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30383 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30384 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30385 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30386 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30387 cannot support all packages and
30391 \begin_layout Standard
30392 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30393 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30394 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30398 Code box is created by the menu
30400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30402 \begin_inset space ~
30407 or by the toolbar button
30420 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30428 \begin_layout Standard
30429 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30431 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30433 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30434 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30441 , you can write the command part
30447 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30448 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30452 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30453 Code box behind the word.
30454 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30455 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30459 \begin_layout Standard
30460 \begin_inset Graphics
30461 filename clipart/ERT.png
30469 \begin_layout Standard
30473 \begin_layout Standard
30474 This is a line with a
30478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30501 \begin_layout Standard
30502 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30510 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30511 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30512 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30513 know that the command is finished.
30521 \begin_layout Subsection
30522 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30524 \begin_inset Argument 1
30527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30528 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30535 \begin_inset Index idx
30538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30548 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30555 \begin_layout Standard
30556 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30557 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30558 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30559 uses in the background.
30560 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30561 is based on commands, you can
30562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30570 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30571 any time if you know the right commands.
30572 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30573 is the end of the day.
30574 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30575 all caption labels bold.
30576 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30578 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30582 \begin_layout Standard
30583 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30585 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30587 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30599 \begin_layout Standard
30600 As result you find that the package
30605 \begin_inset Index idx
30608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30610 -packages ! caption
30616 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30618 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30621 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30625 \begin_inset space ~
30633 \begin_layout Standard
30638 usepackage[options]{package name}
30641 \begin_layout Standard
30642 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30643 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30644 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30645 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30648 \begin_layout Standard
30649 In your case the package name is
30654 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30659 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30660 So you add the command
30663 \begin_layout Standard
30668 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30671 \begin_layout Standard
30672 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30677 For more commands provided by the
30681 package, have a look at its documentation,
30682 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30696 \begin_layout Standard
30697 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30699 For example if you use a
30703 class, you don't need the package
30707 , you can instead write
30710 \begin_layout Standard
30715 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30720 \begin_layout Standard
30721 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30722 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30723 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30730 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30733 \begin_layout Standard
30734 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30735 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30737 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30738 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30739 Code box as described in the previous
30743 \begin_layout Standard
30744 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30745 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30748 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30750 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30757 \begin_layout Standard
30758 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30764 \begin_layout Standard
30768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30778 \begin_inset Note Note
30781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30782 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30790 \begin_layout Left Header
30791 \begin_inset Argument 1
30794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30814 \begin_inset Note Note
30817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30818 defines the header line as described below
30826 \begin_layout Center Header
30827 \begin_inset Argument 1
30830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30839 \begin_layout Right Header
30840 \begin_inset Argument 1
30843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30864 \begin_layout Left Footer
30865 \begin_inset Argument 1
30868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30889 \begin_layout Center Footer
30890 \begin_inset Argument 1
30893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30905 \begin_inset Newline newline
30909 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30915 \begin_layout Right Footer
30916 \begin_inset Argument 1
30919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30941 \begin_layout Section
30942 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30945 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30950 \begin_inset Index idx
30953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30954 Document ! Header/Footer line
30960 \begin_inset Index idx
30963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30972 \begin_layout Standard
30973 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30977 \begin_inset space ~
30988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30994 \begin_inset space ~
31000 As a second step add in the menu
31002 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31003 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31010 Custom Header/Footerlines
31011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31015 This module offers the following 6
31016 \begin_inset space ~
31022 \begin_layout Description
31024 \begin_inset space ~
31028 \begin_inset space ~
31032 \begin_inset space ~
31036 \begin_inset space ~
31040 \begin_inset space ~
31046 \begin_layout Description
31048 \begin_inset space ~
31052 \begin_inset space ~
31056 \begin_inset space ~
31060 \begin_inset space ~
31064 \begin_inset space ~
31070 \begin_layout Standard
31071 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31074 \begin_layout Standard
31075 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31076 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31078 \begin_inset space ~
31082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31084 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31088 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31091 \begin_layout Standard
31092 \begin_inset Float figure
31098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31101 \begin_inset Tabular
31102 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31103 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31104 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31105 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31106 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31108 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31126 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31137 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31155 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31166 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31170 The normal text on the page goes here.
31171 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31173 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31174 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31179 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31188 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31199 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31217 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31228 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31246 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31264 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31269 name "fig:Page-layout"
31273 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31286 \begin_layout Standard
31287 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31295 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31299 \begin_inset space ~
31304 is set to “Default”.
31305 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31314 \begin_layout Subsection
31318 \begin_layout Standard
31319 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31320 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31321 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31322 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31324 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31325 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31328 \begin_layout Standard
31329 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31330 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31336 \begin_inset space ~
31344 \begin_layout Description
31347 thepage prints the current page number
31350 \begin_layout Description
31353 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31356 \begin_layout Description
31359 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31362 \begin_layout Description
31365 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31366 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31373 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31376 because it usually goes in a left header.
31379 \begin_layout Description
31382 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31383 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31385 It is normally used in the right header.
31388 \begin_layout Subsection
31389 Default header/footer
31392 \begin_layout Standard
31393 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31394 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31395 footer has the page number.
31396 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31397 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31398 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31401 \begin_inset space ~
31409 \begin_layout Subsection
31413 \begin_layout Standard
31414 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31415 Some pages are different.
31416 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31417 a new part or chapter in your book.
31418 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31419 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31420 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31423 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31424 Header and footer decoration line
31427 \begin_layout Standard
31428 By default, you get a 0.4
31429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31432 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31433 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31445 in the following way:
31448 \begin_layout Standard
31455 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31458 \begin_layout Standard
31459 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31468 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31475 \begin_layout Standard
31476 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31478 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31479 \begin_inset space ~
31483 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31493 Several header/footer lines
31496 \begin_layout Standard
31497 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31498 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31499 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31501 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31517 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31519 \begin_inset space ~
31527 \begin_layout Standard
31534 headheight}{height}
31537 \begin_layout Standard
31538 where height is a size in standard units.
31539 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31540 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31541 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31542 logfile with the menu
31544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31550 \begin_inset space ~
31555 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31560 \begin_inset Index idx
31563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31565 -packages ! fancyhdr
31571 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31572 for your header/footer.
31575 \begin_layout Subsection
31579 \begin_layout Standard
31580 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31581 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31582 This example consists of the following definition:
31585 \begin_layout Description
31587 \begin_inset space ~
31596 , empty optional argument
31599 \begin_layout Description
31601 \begin_inset space ~
31604 Header empty, empty optional argument
31607 \begin_layout Description
31609 \begin_inset space ~
31618 in the optional argument
31621 \begin_layout Description
31623 \begin_inset space ~
31632 in the optional argument
31635 \begin_layout Description
31637 \begin_inset space ~
31650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31654 \begin_inset Newline newline
31658 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31665 in the optional argument
31668 \begin_layout Description
31670 \begin_inset space ~
31679 , empty optional argument
31682 \begin_layout Description
31685 headrulewidth set to 2
31686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31692 \begin_layout Standard
31693 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31694 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31700 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31709 \begin_layout Standard
31710 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31716 \begin_layout Standard
31720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31724 pagestyle{headings}
31730 \begin_inset Note Note
31733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31734 switches back to page style with the default headings
31742 \begin_layout Section
31743 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31746 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31751 \begin_inset Index idx
31754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31761 \begin_inset Index idx
31764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31773 \begin_layout Standard
31775 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31776 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31777 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31780 \begin_layout Subsection
31784 \begin_layout Standard
31785 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31791 \begin_inset Index idx
31794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31796 -packages ! preview-latex
31801 (on some systems named simply
31806 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31808 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31814 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31816 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31824 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31825 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31826 -package are automatically
31827 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31831 \begin_layout Subsection
31835 \begin_layout Standard
31836 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31837 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31839 activate the option
31842 \begin_inset space ~
31849 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31855 \begin_inset space ~
31859 \begin_inset space ~
31862 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31869 \begin_inset space ~
31882 \begin_inset space ~
31887 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31890 \begin_layout Standard
31891 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31896 \begin_inset space ~
31904 \begin_inset space ~
31912 \begin_layout Standard
31913 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31914 and when you finish
31918 \begin_layout Standard
31919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31927 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31928 generated by activating the option
31931 \begin_inset space ~
31937 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31945 \begin_layout Subsection
31946 Selected document parts
31949 \begin_layout Standard
31950 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31951 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31952 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31953 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31955 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31961 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31962 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31963 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31966 \begin_layout Standard
31967 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31974 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31986 is explained in section
31988 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31993 \begin_inset space ~
32003 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32004 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32005 the final rotated boxes,
32006 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32007 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32009 Here is the result:
32012 \begin_layout Standard
32013 \begin_inset Preview
32015 \begin_layout Standard
32020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32024 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32030 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32040 height_special "totalheight"
32045 backgroundcolor "none"
32048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32073 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32079 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32101 \begin_layout Standard
32102 Previewing works also for colors.
32103 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32122 is explained in section
32129 \begin_inset space ~
32142 \begin_layout Standard
32143 \begin_inset Preview
32145 \begin_layout Standard
32149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32168 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32173 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32192 \begin_layout Standard
32193 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32199 \begin_layout Standard
32200 If \SpecialChar LyX
32201 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32202 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32203 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32204 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32205 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32206 the \SpecialChar TeX
32208 If \SpecialChar LyX
32209 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32210 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32212 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32213 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32214 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32217 \begin_layout Subsection
32222 \begin_layout Standard
32223 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32224 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32227 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32229 \begin_inset space ~
32234 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32236 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32238 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32239 's main window, then only this selection
32240 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32241 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32242 the source view window.
32247 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32248 ; but note that if you have
32249 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32251 not just the one which is open at the time.
32254 \begin_layout Section
32255 Advanced Find and Replace
32256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32258 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32263 \begin_inset Index idx
32266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32273 \begin_inset Index idx
32276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32285 \begin_layout Subsection
32289 \begin_layout Standard
32290 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32291 allows for searching of complex,
32292 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32294 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32295 The key-features are:
32298 \begin_layout Itemize
32299 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32300 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32301 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32305 \begin_layout Itemize
32306 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32307 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32308 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32309 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32312 \begin_layout Itemize
32313 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32314 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32315 outside of mathematics environments
32318 \begin_layout Itemize
32319 Search may be widened to a specific
32324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32328 \begin_inset space ~
32331 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32332 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32339 \begin_layout Itemize
32340 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32341 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32346 \begin_inset space ~
32349 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32352 \begin_layout Subsection
32356 \begin_layout Standard
32357 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32359 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32372 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32375 ) or the toolbar button
32378 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32384 Advanced Find and Replace
32389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32393 \begin_layout Standard
32399 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32403 \begin_inset space ~
32408 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32411 arg "paragraph-break"
32415 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32416 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32420 arg "paragraph-break"
32423 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32427 searches backwards.
32430 \begin_layout Standard
32434 \begin_inset space ~
32439 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32448 \begin_inset space ~
32453 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32457 Searching for mathematics
32460 \begin_layout Standard
32461 Mathematical formulas, such as
32462 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32465 or something more complex like
32466 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32469 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32474 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32475 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32476 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32477 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32487 \begin_layout Standard
32488 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32489 This is done by switching to the
32493 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32498 This way, entering in the
32505 \begin_layout Itemize
32506 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32507 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32510 \begin_layout Itemize
32511 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32512 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32515 \begin_layout Itemize
32516 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32517 of it only within section headings.
32518 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32519 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32523 \begin_layout Itemize
32524 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32525 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32532 \begin_layout Standard
32533 The entries made in the
32537 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32540 \begin_inset space ~
32546 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32550 button or alternatively press
32553 arg "paragraph-break"
32560 while the cursor is in the
32563 \begin_inset space ~
32571 \begin_layout Standard
32572 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32574 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32578 \begin_layout Itemize
32579 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32580 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32588 with its typewriter version
32589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32603 \begin_layout Itemize
32604 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32610 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32622 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32629 (you may want to enable the
32632 \begin_inset space ~
32640 \begin_inset space ~
32645 options and disable the
32653 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32661 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32662 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32666 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32669 , or occurrences of
32670 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32674 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32680 \begin_layout Subsection
32684 \begin_layout Standard
32685 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32690 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32692 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32694 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32703 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32709 This is done with the context menu
32711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32712 Insert Regular Expression
32714 while the cursor is in the
32719 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32720 expression matching rules
32724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32725 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32732 \begin_inset space ~
32735 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32736 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32742 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32743 same text in the document.
32744 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32745 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32748 \begin_layout Enumerate
32749 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32754 editor the fraction
32755 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32759 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32762 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32763 fractions with the given denominator.
32766 \begin_layout Enumerate
32767 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32779 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32784 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32785 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32786 Also, by inserting a
32787 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32790 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32791 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32794 \begin_layout Standard
32795 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32796 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32797 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32800 , and referring back to them through
32801 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32805 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32809 For example, try searching with the regexp
32810 \begin_inset Newline newline
32813 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32816 \begin_inset Newline newline
32819 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32822 \begin_layout Standard
32823 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32826 \begin_layout Standard
32827 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32835 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32836 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32837 sub-expressions is absolute.
32839 \begin_inset space ~
32843 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32846 always refers to the first occurrence of
32847 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32850 in all entered regexps.
32858 \begin_layout Section
32860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32862 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32867 \begin_inset Index idx
32870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32879 \begin_layout Standard
32881 has a built-in spell checker.
32884 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32891 key or the toolbar button
32894 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32897 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32898 beginning of the currently selected text.
32899 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32900 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32901 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32902 scrolled so that it is visible.
32903 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32904 n, if any could be found.
32905 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32909 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32910 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32913 \begin_layout Standard
32914 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32921 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32922 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32924 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32925 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32928 \begin_inset space ~
32936 arg "dialog-show character"
32939 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32941 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32944 \begin_layout Standard
32945 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32946 can be downloaded from here:
32947 \begin_inset Newline newline
32951 \begin_inset Flex URL
32954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32956 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32962 \begin_inset Newline newline
32966 \begin_inset space ~
32969 files for each language.
32970 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32971 \begin_inset space ~
32974 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32975 's installation subfolder
32983 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32985 \begin_inset Newline newline
32988 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32989 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32990 but in most cases these are
33006 is the language code.
33009 \begin_layout Subsection
33013 \begin_layout Standard
33016 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33017 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33019 \begin_inset space ~
33022 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33025 you can set the following things:
33028 \begin_layout Description
33030 \begin_inset space ~
33033 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33034 should use for spell checking.
33035 Depending on your platform,
33049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33050 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33051 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33066 \begin_inset space ~
33069 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33072 \begin_layout Description
33074 \begin_inset space ~
33077 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33078 will always use the given language
33079 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33082 \begin_layout Description
33084 \begin_inset space ~
33087 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33093 \begin_inset space \space{}
33097 This should normally not be needed.
33100 \begin_layout Description
33102 \begin_inset space ~
33106 \begin_inset space ~
33109 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33121 \begin_layout Description
33123 \begin_inset space ~
33126 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33127 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33128 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33129 appear in a context menu.
33130 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33134 \begin_layout Description
33136 \begin_inset space ~
33140 \begin_inset space ~
33144 \begin_inset space ~
33147 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33151 \begin_layout Section
33153 \begin_inset Index idx
33156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33165 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33172 \begin_layout Standard
33174 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33175 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33185 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33187 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33196 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33198 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33199 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33200 which are available for many languages.
33203 \begin_layout Standard
33204 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33205 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33209 \begin_layout Subsection
33210 Setting up the thesaurus
33213 \begin_layout Standard
33222 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33226 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33231 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33237 \begin_inset space ~
33245 For instance, the US English files are named:
33248 \begin_layout Itemize
33252 \begin_layout Itemize
33256 \begin_layout Standard
33265 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33266 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33269 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33270 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33271 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33273 \begin_inset space ~
33278 ) to the path where they are installed.
33282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33283 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33284 ies, typical locations are
33290 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33294 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33298 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33301 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33307 LibreOffice-<Version>
33314 On the Mac, the default location is
33316 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33317 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33318 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33319 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33320 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33321 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33329 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33330 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33331 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33335 \begin_layout Standard
33336 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33337 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33341 \begin_layout Itemize
33342 \begin_inset Flex URL
33345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33347 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33355 \begin_layout Standard
33356 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33357 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33359 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33360 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33361 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33363 \begin_inset space ~
33368 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33370 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33371 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33375 \begin_layout Standard
33376 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33378 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33381 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33387 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33390 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33391 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33399 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33400 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33401 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33403 \begin_inset space ~
33408 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33411 \begin_layout Subsection
33412 Using the thesaurus
33415 \begin_layout Standard
33416 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33418 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33421 or the toolbar button
33424 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33427 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33429 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33431 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33432 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33433 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33442 ), related terms (such as
33445 \begin_inset space ~
33454 ), compounds (such as
33457 \begin_inset space ~
33466 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33475 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33478 \begin_layout Standard
33479 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33480 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33484 \begin_layout Standard
33485 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33486 the dictionary, such as the above
33490 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33495 \begin_inset space \space{}
33498 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33499 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33500 For example, looking up the word form
33504 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33509 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33514 \begin_inset space \space{}
33525 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33526 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33527 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33530 \begin_layout Section
33532 \begin_inset Index idx
33535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33542 \begin_inset Index idx
33545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33546 Document ! Change Tracking
33552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33554 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33561 \begin_layout Standard
33562 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33563 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33564 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33565 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33569 \begin_inset space ~
33572 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33574 \begin_inset space ~
33582 \begin_layout Standard
33583 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33597 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33598 You can change the color in
33600 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33601 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33603 \begin_inset space ~
33607 \begin_inset space ~
33612 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33618 \begin_inset Index idx
33621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33622 Color ! Change tracking
33627 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33628 's status bar when the
33629 cursor is in changed text.
33630 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33633 arg "changes-merge"
33639 \begin_layout Standard
33640 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33642 \begin_inset Index idx
33645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33654 \begin_layout Standard
33655 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33661 \begin_layout Standard
33662 \begin_inset Graphics
33663 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33671 \begin_layout Standard
33672 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33679 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33682 \begin_layout Standard
33683 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33689 \begin_layout Standard
33690 \begin_inset Tabular
33691 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33692 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33693 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33694 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33695 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33704 arg "changes-track"
33712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33718 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33720 \begin_inset space ~
33723 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33725 \begin_inset space ~
33734 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33743 arg "changes-output"
33751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33757 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33759 \begin_inset space ~
33762 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33764 \begin_inset space ~
33768 \begin_inset space ~
33772 \begin_inset space ~
33781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33802 Jumps to the next change
33808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33817 arg "change-accept"
33825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33831 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33833 \begin_inset space ~
33836 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33856 arg "change-reject"
33864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33872 \begin_inset space ~
33875 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33877 \begin_inset space ~
33886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33895 arg "changes-merge"
33903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33911 \begin_inset space ~
33914 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33916 \begin_inset space ~
33925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33934 arg "all-changes-accept"
33942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33950 \begin_inset space ~
33953 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33955 \begin_inset space ~
33959 \begin_inset space ~
33968 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33977 arg "all-changes-reject"
33985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33993 \begin_inset space ~
33996 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34002 \begin_inset space ~
34011 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34034 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34035 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34037 \begin_inset space ~
34046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34069 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34071 \begin_inset space ~
34087 \begin_layout Standard
34088 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34094 \begin_layout Standard
34095 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34115 \begin_layout Standard
34116 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34117 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34118 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34119 the next change after the current cursor position.
34120 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34121 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34122 step to the next change.
34123 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34127 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34128 to describe a change.
34131 \begin_layout Standard
34132 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34138 \begin_inset Index idx
34141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34143 -packages ! dvipost
34149 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34151 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34157 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34161 \begin_layout Section
34162 Comparison of Documents
34163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34165 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34170 \begin_inset Index idx
34173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34174 Comparison of documents
34182 \begin_layout Standard
34183 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34186 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34190 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34191 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34193 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34195 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34203 \begin_inset space ~
34207 \begin_inset space ~
34216 \begin_inset space ~
34220 \begin_inset space ~
34224 \begin_inset space ~
34228 \begin_inset space ~
34232 \begin_inset space ~
34236 \begin_inset space ~
34241 enables the change tracking option
34244 \begin_inset space ~
34248 \begin_inset space ~
34252 \begin_inset space ~
34257 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34260 \begin_layout Section
34261 International Support
34262 \begin_inset Index idx
34265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34266 International support
34274 \begin_layout Standard
34275 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34276 with any language you want.
34277 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34278 up \SpecialChar LyX
34280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34282 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34289 \begin_layout Standard
34290 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34291 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34292 \begin_inset space ~
34296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34298 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34305 \begin_layout Subsection
34307 \begin_inset Index idx
34310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34317 \begin_inset Index idx
34320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34321 Document ! Settings
34327 \begin_inset Index idx
34330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34331 Document ! Language
34339 \begin_layout Standard
34342 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34343 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34346 dialog lets you set
34348 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34353 \begin_layout Standard
34358 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34363 \begin_inset space ~
34368 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34369 For details about the different encoding options see section
34370 \begin_inset space ~
34374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34376 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34383 \begin_layout Subsection
34384 Keyboard mapping configuration
34385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34387 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34394 \begin_layout Standard
34395 If you have for example a U.
34396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34399 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34400 can use an alternate keymap.
34401 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34406 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34407 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34408 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34411 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34412 \begin_inset space ~
34416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34418 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34423 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34424 which one you want to use.
34427 \begin_layout Standard
34428 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34429 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34430 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34434 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34435 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34436 one to support the characters you want.
34437 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34444 \begin_layout Chapter
34447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34449 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34456 \begin_layout Standard
34457 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34458 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34459 topic inside the user's guide.
34462 \begin_layout Section
34464 \begin_inset Index idx
34467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34476 \begin_layout Standard
34481 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34484 \begin_layout Subsection
34488 \begin_layout Standard
34489 Creates a new document.
34492 \begin_layout Subsection
34496 \begin_layout Standard
34497 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34498 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34499 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34502 \begin_layout Subsection
34506 \begin_layout Standard
34510 \begin_layout Subsection
34514 \begin_layout Standard
34515 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34516 Click there on a file to open it.
34519 \begin_layout Subsection
34523 \begin_layout Standard
34524 Closes the current document.
34527 \begin_layout Subsection
34531 \begin_layout Standard
34532 Closes all opened documents.
34535 \begin_layout Subsection
34539 \begin_layout Standard
34540 Saves the actual document.
34543 \begin_layout Subsection
34547 \begin_layout Standard
34548 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34551 \begin_layout Subsection
34555 \begin_layout Standard
34556 Saves all opened documents.
34559 \begin_layout Subsection
34563 \begin_layout Standard
34564 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34567 \begin_layout Subsection
34571 \begin_layout Standard
34572 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34573 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34574 It is described in the section
34576 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34581 Additional Features
34586 \begin_layout Subsection
34590 \begin_layout Standard
34591 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34592 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34594 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34595 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34599 \begin_layout Standard
34600 When using the menu entry
34603 \begin_inset space ~
34608 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34612 \begin_inset space ~
34616 \begin_inset space ~
34620 \begin_inset space ~
34625 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34626 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34629 \begin_layout Subsection
34631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34633 name "subsec:Export"
34640 \begin_layout Standard
34641 You can export your document to various file formats.
34642 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34644 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34645 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34646 during its configuration.
34649 \begin_layout Standard
34650 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34652 \begin_inset space ~
34656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34658 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34665 \begin_layout Description
34671 \begin_inset space ~
34674 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34676 \begin_inset space ~
34679 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34680 \begin_inset Newline newline
34683 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34684 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34688 \begin_layout Description
34689 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34695 \begin_layout Description
34697 \begin_inset space ~
34700 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34706 \begin_layout Description
34707 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34708 's native DVI-format.
34709 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34710 files paths or file names in your document.
34712 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34719 \begin_layout Description
34720 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34721 in files paths or file names
34724 \begin_layout Description
34726 \begin_inset space ~
34733 ) DVI-format using the program
34735 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34738 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34742 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34750 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34758 \begin_layout Description
34760 \begin_inset space ~
34763 (cropped) the same as
34767 but with cropped page margins.
34770 \begin_layout Description
34772 \begin_inset space ~
34775 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34779 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34784 \begin_layout Description
34788 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34796 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34804 \begin_layout Description
34806 \begin_inset space ~
34810 \begin_inset space ~
34813 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34817 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34825 \begin_layout Description
34829 \begin_inset space ~
34838 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34839 source that is compilable with the program
34841 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34845 \begin_layout Description
34849 \begin_inset space ~
34854 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34855 source, additionally all images used in the document
34856 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34860 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34863 \begin_layout Description
34867 \begin_inset space ~
34872 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34873 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34874 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34882 \begin_layout Description
34886 \begin_inset space ~
34895 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34896 source that is compilable with the program
34902 \begin_layout Description
34904 \begin_inset space ~
34908 \begin_inset space ~
34915 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34916 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34922 \begin_layout Description
34924 \begin_inset space ~
34927 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34928 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34934 \begin_inset space \space{}
34939 \begin_inset space ~
34943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34958 represent the version number)
34961 \begin_layout Description
34963 \begin_inset space ~
34967 \begin_inset space ~
34970 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34971 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34972 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34976 \begin_layout Description
34977 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34978 's internal XHTML engine
34981 \begin_layout Description
34983 \begin_inset space ~
34987 \begin_inset space ~
34991 \begin_inset space ~
34995 \begin_inset space ~
34998 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35003 For the conversion the program
35012 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35015 \begin_layout Description
35016 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35021 \begin_layout Description
35023 \begin_inset space ~
35026 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35028 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35031 For the conversion the program
35040 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35043 \begin_layout Description
35045 \begin_inset space ~
35048 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35049 For the conversion the program
35058 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35061 \begin_layout Description
35063 \begin_inset space ~
35066 (cropped) the same as
35069 \begin_inset space ~
35074 but with cropped page margins
35077 \begin_layout Description
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35086 PDF-format using the program
35090 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35093 \begin_layout Description
35097 \begin_inset space ~
35101 \begin_inset space ~
35109 \begin_inset space ~
35114 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35119 \begin_inset space \space{}
35122 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35126 \begin_layout Description
35130 \begin_inset space ~
35135 PDF-format using the program
35137 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35140 , produces PDF-files directly
35143 \begin_layout Description
35147 \begin_inset space ~
35152 PDF-format using the program
35156 , produces PDF-files directly
35159 \begin_layout Description
35163 \begin_inset space ~
35168 PDF-format using the program
35172 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35175 \begin_layout Description
35179 \begin_inset space ~
35184 PDF-format using the program
35189 , produces PDF-files directly
35192 \begin_layout Description
35196 \begin_inset space ~
35204 \begin_layout Description
35208 \begin_inset space ~
35212 \begin_inset space ~
35217 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35218 and then exported as text using the program
35223 \begin_layout Description
35228 PostScript format using the program
35233 \begin_layout Description
35234 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35235 source and also code in the statistical programming
35249 it is possible to use
35253 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35257 \begin_layout Standard
35258 If one of the menu entries
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35274 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35276 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35278 \begin_inset space ~
35282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35284 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35289 \begin_inset Index idx
35292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35293 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35302 \begin_layout Subsection
35306 \begin_layout Standard
35307 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35308 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35311 \begin_inset space ~
35315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35317 reference "sec:Paths"
35322 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35331 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35332 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35333 's preferences as described in section
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35340 reference "subsec:Converters"
35347 \begin_layout Subsection
35348 New and Close Window
35351 \begin_layout Standard
35352 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35356 \begin_layout Subsection
35360 \begin_layout Standard
35361 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35364 \begin_layout Section
35366 \begin_inset Index idx
35369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35378 \begin_layout Subsection
35382 \begin_layout Standard
35383 Described in section
35384 \begin_inset space ~
35388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35390 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35397 \begin_layout Subsection
35398 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35401 \begin_layout Standard
35402 Described in section
35403 \begin_inset space ~
35407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35409 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35416 \begin_layout Subsection
35420 \begin_layout Standard
35421 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35422 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35425 \begin_layout Subsection
35429 \begin_layout Standard
35430 Selects the whole document.
35433 \begin_layout Subsection
35434 Find & Replace (Quick)
35437 \begin_layout Standard
35438 Described in section
35439 \begin_inset space ~
35443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35445 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35452 \begin_layout Subsection
35453 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35456 \begin_layout Standard
35457 Described in section
35458 \begin_inset space ~
35462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35464 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35471 \begin_layout Subsection
35472 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35475 \begin_layout Standard
35476 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35480 \begin_layout Subsection
35484 \begin_layout Standard
35485 Described in section
35486 \begin_inset space ~
35490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35492 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35499 \begin_layout Subsection
35501 \begin_inset Index idx
35504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35505 Paragraph ! Settings
35513 \begin_layout Standard
35514 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35515 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35519 \begin_layout Standard
35520 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35521 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35527 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35528 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35530 \begin_inset space ~
35538 \begin_layout Subsection
35542 \begin_layout Standard
35543 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35544 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35545 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35549 \begin_layout Standard
35550 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35552 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35553 The properties of tables are described in section
35554 \begin_inset space ~
35558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35560 reference "sec:Tables"
35564 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35565 \begin_inset space ~
35569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35571 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35578 \begin_layout Subsection
35579 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35582 \begin_layout Standard
35583 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35585 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35586 \begin_inset space ~
35590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35592 reference "sec:Nesting"
35597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35599 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35606 \begin_layout Subsection
35609 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35612 \begin_layout Standard
35613 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35614 nts of the same type.
35616 \begin_inset space ~
35620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35622 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35626 for an explanation.
35629 \begin_layout Section
35631 \begin_inset Index idx
35634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35643 \begin_layout Standard
35644 At the bottom of the
35648 menu the opened documents are listed.
35651 \begin_layout Subsection
35652 Open/Close all Insets
35655 \begin_layout Standard
35656 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35659 \begin_layout Subsection
35660 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35663 \begin_layout Standard
35664 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35667 \begin_layout Standard
35668 Math macros are described in the
35675 \begin_layout Subsection
35679 \begin_layout Standard
35680 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35681 \begin_inset space ~
35685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35687 reference "sec:Navigating"
35692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35694 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35701 \begin_layout Subsection
35705 \begin_layout Standard
35706 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35708 \begin_inset space ~
35712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35714 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35721 \begin_layout Subsection
35725 \begin_layout Standard
35726 Opens a window showing console messages.
35727 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35732 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35733 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35734 is processing the document.
35737 \begin_layout Subsection
35739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35741 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35746 \begin_inset Index idx
35749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35758 \begin_layout Standard
35759 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35760 All toolbars and the
35763 \begin_inset space ~
35768 can be turned on and off.
35773 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35785 \begin_inset space ~
35797 \begin_inset space ~
35802 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35806 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35818 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35822 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35823 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35824 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35825 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35826 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35829 \begin_layout Standard
35831 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35832 \begin_inset space ~
35836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35838 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35845 \begin_layout Subsection
35849 \begin_layout Standard
35853 \begin_inset space ~
35857 \begin_inset space ~
35861 \begin_inset space ~
35865 \begin_inset space ~
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35873 \begin_inset space ~
35878 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35879 's main window vertically while
35882 \begin_inset space ~
35886 \begin_inset space ~
35890 \begin_inset space ~
35894 \begin_inset space ~
35898 \begin_inset space ~
35902 \begin_inset space ~
35907 will split it horizontally.
35908 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35909 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35910 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35911 three or more documents at the same time.
35912 To close a split view, use the menu
35915 \begin_inset space ~
35919 \begin_inset space ~
35927 \begin_layout Subsection
35931 \begin_layout Standard
35932 Closes a split view.
35935 \begin_layout Subsection
35939 \begin_layout Standard
35940 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35941 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35942 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35943 's main window fullscreen.
35944 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35945 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35948 \begin_layout Section
35950 \begin_inset Index idx
35953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35962 \begin_layout Subsection
35966 \begin_layout Standard
35967 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35968 \begin_inset space ~
35972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35974 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35985 \begin_layout Subsection
35987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35989 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35996 \begin_layout Standard
35997 Here you can insert the following characters:
36000 \begin_layout Description
36005 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36008 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36009 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36010 -packages you have installed.
36011 You can get a complete display by checking
36014 \begin_inset space ~
36020 \begin_inset Newline newline
36024 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36032 Not all characters will be visible in the
36036 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36044 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36048 ) can display every character.
36056 \begin_layout Description
36057 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36061 \begin_layout Description
36063 \begin_inset space ~
36067 \begin_inset space ~
36070 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36071 \begin_inset space ~
36075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36077 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36084 \begin_layout Description
36086 \begin_inset space ~
36089 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36093 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36099 \begin_layout Description
36101 \begin_inset space ~
36104 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36108 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36114 \begin_layout Description
36116 \begin_inset space ~
36119 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36123 \begin_layout Description
36125 \begin_inset space ~
36128 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36132 \begin_layout Description
36134 \begin_inset space ~
36137 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36143 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36149 \begin_layout Description
36151 \begin_inset space ~
36154 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36158 \begin_layout Description
36160 \begin_inset space ~
36164 \begin_inset Index idx
36167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36174 \begin_inset Index idx
36177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36178 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36183 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36184 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36186 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36192 \begin_inset Index idx
36195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36203 \begin_inset Newline newline
36206 More information about this feature can be found in the
36212 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36218 \begin_layout Description
36219 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36221 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36222 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36226 \begin_layout Subsection
36230 \begin_layout Standard
36231 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36234 \begin_layout Description
36235 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36236 \begin_inset script superscript
36238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36247 \begin_layout Description
36248 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36249 \begin_inset script subscript
36251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36260 \begin_layout Description
36262 \begin_inset space ~
36265 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36266 \begin_inset space ~
36270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36272 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36279 \begin_layout Description
36281 \begin_inset space ~
36284 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36285 \begin_inset space ~
36289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36291 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36298 \begin_layout Description
36300 \begin_inset space ~
36303 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36304 \begin_inset space ~
36308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36310 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36317 \begin_layout Description
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36322 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36328 \begin_inset space \space{}
36331 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36332 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36341 To insert a fraction use the command
36346 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36350 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36359 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36366 \begin_layout Description
36368 \begin_inset space ~
36371 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36372 \begin_inset space ~
36376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36378 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36385 \begin_layout Description
36387 \begin_inset space ~
36390 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36391 \begin_inset space ~
36395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36397 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36404 \begin_layout Description
36406 \begin_inset space ~
36409 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36410 \begin_inset space ~
36414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36416 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36423 \begin_layout Description
36424 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36425 \begin_inset space ~
36429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36431 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36438 \begin_layout Description
36440 \begin_inset space ~
36443 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36444 \begin_inset space ~
36448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36450 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36457 \begin_layout Description
36459 \begin_inset space ~
36462 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36463 \begin_inset space ~
36467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36469 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36476 \begin_layout Description
36478 \begin_inset space ~
36482 \begin_inset space ~
36485 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36486 \begin_inset space ~
36490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36492 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36499 \begin_layout Description
36501 \begin_inset space ~
36504 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36505 as described in section
36506 \begin_inset space ~
36510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36512 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36519 \begin_layout Description
36521 \begin_inset space ~
36524 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36525 \begin_inset space ~
36529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36531 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36538 \begin_layout Description
36540 \begin_inset space ~
36543 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36544 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36546 \begin_inset space ~
36550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36552 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36559 \begin_layout Description
36561 \begin_inset space ~
36564 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36565 \begin_inset space ~
36569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36571 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36578 \begin_layout Description
36580 \begin_inset space ~
36584 \begin_inset space ~
36587 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36588 \begin_inset space ~
36592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36594 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36601 \begin_layout Subsection
36605 \begin_layout Standard
36606 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36610 \begin_inset space ~
36631 are described in section
36632 \begin_inset space ~
36636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36638 reference "sec:toc"
36647 is described in section
36648 \begin_inset space ~
36652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36654 reference "sec:Index"
36662 is described in section
36663 \begin_inset space ~
36667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36669 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36675 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36678 is described in section
36679 \begin_inset space ~
36683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36685 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36692 \begin_layout Subsection
36696 \begin_layout Standard
36697 To insert floats, as described in section
36698 \begin_inset space ~
36702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36704 reference "sec:Floats"
36708 and in detail the chapter
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36723 \begin_layout Subsection
36727 \begin_layout Standard
36728 To insert notes, described in section
36729 \begin_inset space ~
36733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36735 reference "sec:Notes"
36742 \begin_layout Subsection
36746 \begin_layout Standard
36747 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36749 Branches are described in section
36750 \begin_inset space ~
36754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36756 reference "sec:Branches"
36763 \begin_layout Subsection
36767 \begin_layout Standard
36768 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36769 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36771 An example is the document class
36772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36779 with three custom insets.
36782 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36786 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36792 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36795 \begin_layout Subsection
36797 \begin_inset Index idx
36800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36809 \begin_layout Standard
36810 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36812 For more information see chapter
36814 External Document Parts
36817 \begin_inset space ~
36823 \begin_layout Subsection
36825 \begin_inset Index idx
36828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36837 \begin_layout Standard
36838 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36839 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36846 \begin_inset space ~
36854 \begin_layout Subsection
36858 \begin_layout Standard
36863 dialog as described in section
36864 \begin_inset space ~
36868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36870 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36877 \begin_layout Subsection
36881 \begin_layout Standard
36886 as described in section
36887 \begin_inset space ~
36891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36893 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36900 \begin_layout Subsection
36904 \begin_layout Standard
36909 as described in section
36910 \begin_inset space ~
36914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36916 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36923 \begin_layout Subsection
36925 \begin_inset Index idx
36928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36935 \begin_inset Index idx
36938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36939 Longtables ! Caption
36947 \begin_layout Standard
36948 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36949 Floats are described in section
36950 \begin_inset space ~
36954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36956 reference "sec:Floats"
36960 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36967 \begin_inset space ~
36975 \begin_layout Subsection
36979 \begin_layout Standard
36980 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36981 \begin_inset space ~
36985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36987 reference "sec:Index"
36994 \begin_layout Subsection
36998 \begin_layout Standard
36999 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37000 \begin_inset space ~
37004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37006 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37013 \begin_layout Subsection
37017 \begin_layout Standard
37018 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37019 Tables are described in section
37020 \begin_inset space ~
37024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37026 reference "sec:Tables"
37030 and in detail in the chapter
37037 \begin_inset space ~
37045 \begin_layout Subsection
37049 \begin_layout Standard
37055 Graphics are described in section
37056 \begin_inset space ~
37060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37062 reference "sec:Graphics"
37069 \begin_layout Subsection
37073 \begin_layout Standard
37074 Inserts a URL as described in section
37075 \begin_inset space ~
37079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37081 reference "subsec:URLs"
37088 \begin_layout Subsection
37092 \begin_layout Standard
37093 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37100 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37107 \begin_layout Subsection
37111 \begin_layout Standard
37112 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37119 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37126 \begin_layout Subsection
37130 \begin_layout Standard
37131 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37132 \begin_inset space ~
37136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37138 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37145 \begin_layout Subsection
37149 \begin_layout Standard
37150 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37151 title or caption of a float.
37152 Inserts a short title as described in section
37153 \begin_inset space ~
37157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37159 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37166 \begin_layout Subsection
37171 \begin_layout Standard
37172 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37173 Code box as described in section
37174 \begin_inset space ~
37178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37180 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37187 \begin_layout Subsection
37189 \begin_inset Index idx
37192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37201 \begin_layout Standard
37202 Inserts a program listings box.
37203 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37205 Program Code Listings
37210 \begin_inset space ~
37218 \begin_layout Subsection
37222 \begin_layout Standard
37223 Inserts the actual date.
37224 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37228 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37236 \begin_inset space ~
37244 \begin_layout Subsection
37248 \begin_layout Standard
37249 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37250 \begin_inset space ~
37254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37256 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37263 \begin_layout Section
37265 \begin_inset Index idx
37268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37277 \begin_layout Standard
37278 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37279 \begin_inset space ~
37282 of the current document.
37283 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37286 \begin_layout Subsection
37290 \begin_layout Standard
37291 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37292 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37293 to jump, for example, between section
37294 \begin_inset space ~
37298 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37299 \begin_inset space ~
37302 2.5 and use the submenu
37305 \begin_inset space ~
37309 \begin_inset space ~
37316 \begin_inset space ~
37322 \begin_inset space ~
37326 \begin_inset space ~
37332 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37336 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37342 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37345 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37348 \begin_layout Standard
37349 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37353 \begin_inset space ~
37358 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37361 \begin_inset space ~
37366 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37369 \begin_layout Subsection
37370 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37373 \begin_layout Standard
37374 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37378 \begin_layout Subsection
37382 \begin_layout Standard
37383 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37384 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37385 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37389 \begin_inset space ~
37393 \begin_inset space ~
37401 \begin_layout Subsection
37405 \begin_layout Standard
37406 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37409 The \SpecialChar LyX
37410 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37412 \begin_inset space ~
37420 \begin_inset space ~
37425 manual for a detailed description.
37428 \begin_layout Section
37430 \begin_inset Index idx
37433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37442 \begin_layout Subsection
37446 \begin_layout Standard
37447 Change Tracking is described in section
37448 \begin_inset space ~
37452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37454 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37461 \begin_layout Subsection
37469 \begin_layout Standard
37470 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37471 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37472 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37474 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37475 to the clipboard or update the view.
37476 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37480 \begin_layout Subsection
37481 Start Appendix Here
37484 \begin_layout Standard
37485 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37486 as described in section
37487 \begin_inset space ~
37491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37493 reference "sec:Appendices"
37500 \begin_layout Subsection
37502 \begin_inset space ~
37508 \begin_layout Standard
37509 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37510 default output format for the document (menu
37512 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37513 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37514 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37516 \begin_inset space ~
37520 \begin_inset space ~
37526 \begin_inset space ~
37530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37532 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37536 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37539 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37540 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37542 \begin_inset space ~
37545 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37547 \begin_inset space ~
37550 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37552 \begin_inset space ~
37556 \begin_inset space ~
37562 \begin_inset space ~
37566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37568 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37572 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37573 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37575 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37576 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37578 \begin_inset space ~
37581 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37586 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37590 \begin_inset space ~
37594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37596 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37601 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37602 when it is first configured.
37603 The default output format is
37606 \begin_inset space ~
37614 \begin_layout Subsection
37615 View (Other Formats)
37618 \begin_layout Standard
37619 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37620 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37621 actual document with an external program.
37622 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37623 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37624 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37626 All possible formats are listed in section
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37633 reference "subsec:Export"
37638 You should at least see the menu entry
37643 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37645 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37647 \begin_inset space ~
37651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37653 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37658 \begin_inset Index idx
37661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37662 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37671 \begin_layout Standard
37672 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37673 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37675 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37676 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37678 \begin_inset space ~
37681 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37686 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37690 \begin_inset space ~
37694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37696 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37701 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37702 when it is first configured.
37705 \begin_layout Subsection
37707 \begin_inset space ~
37713 \begin_layout Standard
37714 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37715 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37718 \begin_layout Subsection
37719 Update (Other Formats)
37722 \begin_layout Standard
37723 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37724 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37727 \begin_layout Subsection
37728 View Master Document
37731 \begin_layout Standard
37732 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37748 \begin_inset space ~
37753 manual for more information on this topic).
37754 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37755 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37759 \begin_inset space ~
37763 \begin_inset space ~
37768 generates the output of the whole book, while
37772 will just output the chapter alone.
37775 \begin_layout Standard
37776 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37777 in the document settings (menu
37779 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37780 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37781 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37783 \begin_inset space ~
37787 \begin_inset space ~
37793 \begin_inset space ~
37797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37799 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37803 ) or in the preferences (menu
37805 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37806 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37811 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37813 \begin_inset space ~
37816 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37818 \begin_inset space ~
37822 \begin_inset space ~
37828 \begin_inset space ~
37832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37834 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37841 \begin_layout Subsection
37842 Update Master Document
37845 \begin_layout Standard
37846 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37862 \begin_inset space ~
37867 manual for more information on this topic).
37868 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37869 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37872 \begin_layout Standard
37873 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37874 in the document settings (menu
37876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37877 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37878 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37880 \begin_inset space ~
37884 \begin_inset space ~
37890 \begin_inset space ~
37894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37896 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37900 ) or in the preferences (menu
37902 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37903 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37905 \begin_inset space ~
37908 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37910 \begin_inset space ~
37913 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37915 \begin_inset space ~
37919 \begin_inset space ~
37925 \begin_inset space ~
37929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37931 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37938 \begin_layout Subsection
37940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37942 name "subsec:Compressed"
37949 \begin_layout Standard
37950 Un/compresses the current document.
37951 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37952 compression (see the
37954 Additional Features
37956 manual for details).
37959 \begin_layout Subsection
37963 \begin_layout Standard
37964 The document settings are described in appendix
37965 \begin_inset space ~
37969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37971 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37978 \begin_layout Section
37980 \begin_inset Index idx
37983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37992 \begin_layout Subsection
37996 \begin_layout Standard
37997 Spell checking is explained in section
37998 \begin_inset space ~
38002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38004 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38011 \begin_layout Subsection
38015 \begin_layout Standard
38016 The thesaurus is described in section
38017 \begin_inset space ~
38021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38023 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38030 \begin_layout Subsection
38032 \begin_inset Index idx
38035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38042 \begin_inset Index idx
38045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38054 \begin_layout Standard
38055 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38056 the highlighted document part.
38059 \begin_layout Subsection
38065 \begin_inset Index idx
38068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38069 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38078 \begin_layout Standard
38079 Generates with the help of the program
38081 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38084 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38085 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38086 This feature is not available on Windows.
38089 \begin_layout Subsection
38095 \begin_inset Index idx
38098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38108 \begin_layout Standard
38109 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38114 \begin_inset space ~
38119 to see the full filename paths.
38122 \begin_layout Subsection
38124 \begin_inset Index idx
38127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38136 \begin_layout Standard
38137 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38138 files as described in section
38139 \begin_inset space ~
38143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38145 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38152 \begin_layout Subsection
38154 \begin_inset Index idx
38157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38170 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38188 \begin_inset Index idx
38191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38192 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38201 \begin_layout Standard
38202 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38203 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38204 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38205 -packages and programs it needs; see
38207 \begin_inset space ~
38211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38213 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38220 \begin_layout Subsection
38224 \begin_layout Standard
38229 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38230 \begin_inset space ~
38234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38236 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38243 \begin_layout Section
38245 \begin_inset Index idx
38248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38257 \begin_layout Standard
38258 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38259 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38261 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38265 \begin_layout Standard
38269 \begin_inset space ~
38274 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38275 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38276 packages and classes found
38277 by \SpecialChar LyX
38279 \begin_inset space ~
38283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38285 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38292 \begin_layout Standard
38296 \begin_inset space ~
38301 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38306 \begin_layout Section
38308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38310 name "sec:Toolbars"
38317 \begin_layout Standard
38318 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38319 \begin_inset space ~
38323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38325 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38332 \begin_layout Standard
38333 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38334 This is described in the
38336 Additional Features
38341 \begin_layout Subsection
38343 \begin_inset Index idx
38346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38355 \begin_layout Standard
38356 \begin_inset Graphics
38357 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38365 \begin_layout Standard
38366 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38372 \begin_layout Standard
38373 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38390 \begin_inset Note Note
38393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38394 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38399 manual for more information.
38407 \begin_layout Standard
38408 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38414 \begin_layout Standard
38415 \begin_inset Tabular
38416 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38417 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38425 \begin_inset Graphics
38426 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38440 pull-down box for the environments
38453 \begin_layout Standard
38454 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38460 \begin_layout Standard
38462 \begin_inset Tabular
38463 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38464 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38465 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38466 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38467 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38490 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38497 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38520 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38550 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38566 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38580 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38596 arg "spelling-continuously"
38604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38608 Spellcheck continuously
38614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38637 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38667 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38697 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38704 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38727 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38734 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38757 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38764 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38773 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38787 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38813 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38827 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38846 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38855 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38869 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38870 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38877 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38898 Emphasize text, function of the
38900 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38902 \begin_inset space ~
38905 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38914 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38935 Set text to noun style, function of the
38937 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38939 \begin_inset space ~
38942 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38960 arg "textstyle-apply"
38968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38972 Format text using the current settings in the
38974 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38976 \begin_inset space ~
38979 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39011 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39012 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39014 \begin_inset space ~
39023 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39032 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39046 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39060 arg "tabular-insert"
39068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39074 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39090 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39102 Toggle outline window on/off,
39104 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39111 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39120 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39132 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39147 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39159 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39172 \begin_layout Subsection
39174 \begin_inset Index idx
39177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39186 \begin_layout Standard
39187 \begin_inset Graphics
39188 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39196 \begin_layout Standard
39197 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39203 \begin_layout Standard
39204 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39208 \begin_layout Standard
39209 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39215 \begin_layout Standard
39216 \begin_inset Tabular
39217 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39218 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39219 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39220 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39257 arg "layout Enumerate"
39265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39284 arg "layout Itemize"
39292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39302 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39329 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39338 arg "layout Description"
39346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39365 arg "depth-increment"
39373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39379 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39381 \begin_inset space ~
39385 \begin_inset space ~
39394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39403 arg "depth-decrement"
39411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39417 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39419 \begin_inset space ~
39423 \begin_inset space ~
39432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39441 arg "float-insert figure"
39449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39455 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39456 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39472 arg "float-insert table"
39480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39487 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39524 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39533 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39554 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39563 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39577 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39607 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39609 \begin_inset space ~
39618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39627 arg "nomencl-insert"
39635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39643 \begin_inset space ~
39652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39661 arg "footnote-insert"
39669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39691 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39707 \begin_inset space ~
39716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39739 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39740 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39742 \begin_inset space ~
39751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39760 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39804 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39836 \begin_inset space ~
39845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39854 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39869 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39885 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39899 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39900 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39902 \begin_inset space ~
39911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39920 arg "dialog-show character"
39928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39934 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39936 \begin_inset space ~
39939 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39955 arg "layout-paragraph"
39963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39969 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39971 \begin_inset space ~
39980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39989 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40003 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40017 \begin_layout Subsection
40018 View/Update Toolbar
40019 \begin_inset Index idx
40022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40023 Toolbar ! View / Update
40031 \begin_layout Standard
40032 \begin_inset Graphics
40033 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40040 \begin_layout Standard
40041 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40047 \begin_layout Standard
40048 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40052 \begin_layout Standard
40053 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40059 \begin_layout Standard
40060 \begin_inset Tabular
40061 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40062 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40063 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40064 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40065 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40088 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40104 arg "buffer-update"
40112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40118 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40134 arg "master-buffer-view"
40142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40150 \begin_inset space ~
40159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40168 arg "master-buffer-update"
40176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40184 \begin_inset space ~
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40206 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40220 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40221 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40222 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40223 Synchronize with Output
40229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40252 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40253 View (Other Formats)
40259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40266 arg "update-others"
40274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40281 Update (Other Formats)
40294 \begin_layout Standard
40295 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40299 \begin_layout Subsection
40303 \begin_layout Standard
40304 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40305 \begin_inset space ~
40309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40311 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40315 , the table toolbar
40316 \begin_inset Index idx
40319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40333 manual and the math macro toolbar
40334 \begin_inset Index idx
40337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40350 \begin_layout Chapter
40351 The Document Settings
40352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40354 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40359 \begin_inset Index idx
40362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40363 Document ! Settings
40371 \begin_layout Standard
40375 \begin_inset space ~
40380 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40381 is called with the menu
40383 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40387 You can save your document settings as default with the
40389 Save as Document Defaults
40391 button in any dialog.
40392 This will create a template named
40396 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40397 when you create a new document without
40401 \begin_layout Standard
40406 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40407 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40410 \begin_layout Standard
40411 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40412 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40413 to find the one you are looking for.
40414 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40415 the submenus of the dialog.
40417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40421 \begin_inset space \space{}
40425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40432 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40433 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40434 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40437 \begin_layout Section
40441 \begin_layout Standard
40442 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40444 Document classes are described in section
40445 \begin_inset space ~
40449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40451 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40459 \begin_layout Standard
40463 \begin_inset space ~
40468 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40473 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40474 as a layout for a document class.
40475 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40477 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40486 \begin_layout Standard
40487 Some classes use special class options by default.
40488 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40492 and you can decide to use them or not.
40493 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40494 recommended you leave them untouched.
40499 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40500 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40505 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40507 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40513 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40514 \begin_inset Newline newline
40519 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40522 \begin_inset Newline newline
40525 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40526 distribution, see section
40531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40533 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40545 \begin_layout Standard
40550 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40551 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40552 in the background if the child document
40553 is opened without its master.
40554 This way child documents are always compilable.
40555 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40562 \begin_inset space ~
40570 \begin_layout Standard
40571 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40582 \begin_inset Index idx
40585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40587 -packages ! prettyref
40593 \begin_inset Index idx
40596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40598 -packages ! refstyle
40603 for cross-references, see section
40604 \begin_inset space ~
40608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40610 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40617 \begin_layout Section
40621 \begin_layout Standard
40622 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40623 Please refer to the section
40626 \begin_inset space ~
40634 \begin_inset space ~
40639 manual for details.
40642 \begin_layout Section
40646 \begin_layout Standard
40647 Modules are explained in section
40648 \begin_inset space ~
40652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40654 reference "subsec:Modules"
40661 \begin_layout Section
40665 \begin_layout Standard
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40673 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40680 \begin_layout Section
40684 \begin_layout Standard
40685 The document font settings are described in section
40686 \begin_inset space ~
40690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40692 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40699 \begin_layout Section
40703 \begin_layout Standard
40704 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40716 \begin_inset space ~
40721 and whether it should be a
40724 \begin_inset space ~
40729 can also be specified here.
40732 \begin_layout Standard
40733 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40734 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40735 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40737 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40740 \begin_layout Standard
40743 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40746 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40747 justifies the text on screen.
40748 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40752 \begin_layout Section
40756 \begin_layout Standard
40757 This dialog is described in sections
40758 \begin_inset space ~
40762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40764 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40771 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40778 \begin_layout Section
40782 \begin_layout Standard
40783 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40784 \begin_inset space ~
40788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40790 reference "subsec:Margins"
40797 \begin_layout Section
40799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40801 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40806 \begin_inset Index idx
40809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40810 Language ! Encoding
40818 \begin_layout Standard
40819 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40820 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40821 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40823 is always encoded in utf8).
40824 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40825 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40826 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40827 -command is not known for
40828 a particular character).
40831 \begin_layout Standard
40832 If you use the option
40837 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40838 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40839 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40841 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40842 exactly one encoding.
40843 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40846 \begin_layout Standard
40848 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40849 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40850 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40851 installation supports Unicode), choose
40852 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40853 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40854 is quite incomplete, so
40855 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40860 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40861 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40862 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40863 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40864 -commands is not used, because all
40865 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40866 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40867 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40868 , two new alternative engines
40869 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40871 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40873 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40876 \begin_inset space ~
40884 \begin_inset space ~
40892 \begin_inset space ~
40898 \begin_inset space ~
40902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40904 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40909 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40913 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40916 \begin_layout Standard
40920 \begin_inset space ~
40925 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40926 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40936 The possible settings are:
40939 \begin_layout Description
40940 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40942 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40943 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40947 \begin_inset space ~
40951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40953 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40960 \begin_layout Description
40961 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40962 format you will use.
40963 In many cases this will be
40968 \begin_inset Index idx
40971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40979 If the newer package
40984 \begin_inset Index idx
40987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40989 -packages ! polyglossia
40994 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40995 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40996 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40998 this package will be used instead of
41005 \begin_layout Description
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41018 would be more appropriate.
41021 \begin_layout Description
41022 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41023 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41027 (for German texts), type in
41030 \begin_inset Newline newline
41035 usepackage{ngerman}
41038 \begin_layout Description
41039 None will not use a language package.
41040 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41043 \begin_layout Standard
41044 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41047 \begin_layout Description
41049 \begin_inset space ~
41053 \begin_inset space ~
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41064 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41070 \begin_inset Index idx
41073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41075 -packages ! inputenc
41081 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41082 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41083 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41087 \begin_layout Description
41088 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41090 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41091 commands, which may result in a big
41092 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41093 -commands are needed.
41096 \begin_layout Description
41098 \begin_inset space ~
41102 \begin_inset space ~
41105 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41108 \begin_layout Description
41110 \begin_inset space ~
41114 \begin_inset space ~
41117 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41120 \begin_layout Description
41122 \begin_inset space ~
41125 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41128 \begin_layout Description
41130 \begin_inset space ~
41134 \begin_inset space ~
41137 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41138 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41141 \begin_layout Description
41143 \begin_inset space ~
41147 \begin_inset space ~
41150 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41154 \begin_layout Description
41156 \begin_inset space ~
41160 \begin_inset space ~
41163 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41164 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41167 \begin_layout Description
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41173 \begin_inset space ~
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41180 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41187 \begin_layout Description
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41200 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41201 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41204 \begin_layout Description
41206 \begin_inset space ~
41210 \begin_inset space ~
41213 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41214 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41215 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41216 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41217 \begin_inset space ~
41221 \begin_inset space ~
41227 \begin_layout Description
41229 \begin_inset space ~
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41236 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41237 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41238 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41240 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41245 \begin_inset space ~
41251 \begin_layout Description
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41260 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41263 \begin_layout Description
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41272 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41275 \begin_layout Description
41277 \begin_inset space ~
41281 \begin_inset space ~
41284 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41287 \begin_layout Description
41289 \begin_inset space ~
41292 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41295 \begin_layout Description
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41300 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41303 \begin_layout Description
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41312 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41315 \begin_layout Description
41317 \begin_inset space ~
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41327 \begin_layout Description
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41336 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41339 \begin_layout Description
41341 \begin_inset space ~
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41351 \begin_layout Description
41353 \begin_inset space ~
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41360 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41366 \begin_inset Index idx
41369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41376 , when using this, set the document language to
41381 \begin_layout Description
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41387 \begin_inset space ~
41390 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41395 , when using this, set the document language to
41398 \begin_inset space ~
41404 \begin_layout Description
41406 \begin_inset space ~
41410 \begin_inset space ~
41413 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41419 \begin_inset Index idx
41422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41424 -packages ! japanese
41429 , when using this, set the document language to
41434 \begin_layout Description
41436 \begin_inset space ~
41440 \begin_inset space ~
41443 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41448 , when using this, set the document language to
41453 \begin_layout Description
41455 \begin_inset space ~
41459 \begin_inset space ~
41462 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41467 , when using this, set the document language to
41472 \begin_layout Description
41474 \begin_inset space ~
41477 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41480 \begin_layout Description
41482 \begin_inset space ~
41486 \begin_inset space ~
41490 \begin_inset space ~
41493 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41496 \begin_layout Description
41498 \begin_inset space ~
41502 \begin_inset space ~
41506 \begin_inset space ~
41509 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41510 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41511 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41514 \begin_layout Description
41516 \begin_inset space ~
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41526 \begin_layout Description
41528 \begin_inset space ~
41532 \begin_inset space ~
41535 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41536 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41539 \begin_layout Description
41541 \begin_inset space ~
41545 \begin_inset space ~
41548 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41554 \begin_inset Index idx
41557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41564 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41567 \begin_layout Description
41569 \begin_inset space ~
41577 \begin_inset space ~
41580 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41587 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41590 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41597 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41598 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41600 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41603 \begin_layout Description
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41612 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41618 \begin_inset Index idx
41621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41628 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41631 \begin_layout Description
41633 \begin_inset space ~
41636 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41642 \begin_inset Index idx
41645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41647 -packages ! inputenc
41653 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41657 \begin_layout Description
41659 \begin_inset space ~
41663 \begin_inset space ~
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41670 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41677 \begin_layout Description
41679 \begin_inset space ~
41683 \begin_inset space ~
41687 \begin_inset space ~
41690 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41691 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41692 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41696 \begin_layout Description
41698 \begin_inset space ~
41702 \begin_inset space ~
41706 \begin_inset space ~
41709 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41710 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41713 \begin_layout Section
41715 \begin_inset Index idx
41718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41725 \begin_inset Index idx
41728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41735 \begin_inset Index idx
41738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41739 Color ! Shaded boxes
41745 \begin_inset Index idx
41748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41749 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41757 \begin_layout Standard
41758 Here you can alter the font color for the
41762 (default: black), for
41765 \begin_inset space ~
41770 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41774 (default: white) and for
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41787 sets the color back to the default.
41790 \begin_layout Standard
41791 Clicking any button showing
41799 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41800 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41801 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41802 later more quickly.
41805 \begin_layout Standard
41806 Note, if you change the
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41814 font color and use the option
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41822 in the document settings under
41825 \begin_inset space ~
41830 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41831 \begin_inset space ~
41835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41837 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41844 \begin_layout Standard
41845 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41851 \begin_layout Standard
41855 \begin_inset space ~
41864 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41867 \begin_inset space ~
41870 Code after a forced page break:
41873 \begin_layout Itemize
41874 For the page color:
41875 \begin_inset Newline newline
41882 pagecolor{color name}
41885 \begin_layout Itemize
41886 For the text color:
41887 \begin_inset Newline newline
41897 \begin_layout Standard
41898 You are restricted to one of
41934 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41941 \begin_inset space ~
41947 \begin_inset Newline newline
41950 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41951 names to refer to them:
41954 \begin_layout Itemize
41960 \begin_inset Newline newline
41965 page_backgroundcolor
41968 \begin_layout Itemize
41972 \begin_inset space ~
41978 \begin_inset Newline newline
41986 \begin_layout Itemize
41990 \begin_inset space ~
41996 \begin_inset Newline newline
42004 \begin_layout Itemize
42008 \begin_inset space ~
42014 \begin_inset Newline newline
42022 \begin_layout Standard
42023 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42026 \begin_inset space ~
42034 \begin_inset space ~
42042 \begin_layout Section
42046 \begin_layout Standard
42047 Here you can adjust the
42051 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42055 as described in section
42056 \begin_inset space ~
42060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42062 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42069 \begin_layout Section
42073 \begin_layout Standard
42074 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42080 \begin_inset Index idx
42083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42095 \begin_inset Index idx
42098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42100 -packages ! jurabib
42108 Sectioned bibliography
42110 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42116 \begin_inset Index idx
42119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42121 -packages ! bibtopic
42126 and you can select a
42130 for the generation of the bibliography.
42131 For a further description see section
42132 \begin_inset space ~
42136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42138 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42145 \begin_layout Section
42149 \begin_layout Standard
42150 Here you can define the
42154 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42156 \begin_inset space ~
42160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42162 reference "sec:Index"
42169 \begin_layout Section
42173 \begin_layout Standard
42174 The PDF properties are explained in section
42175 \begin_inset space ~
42179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42181 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42188 \begin_layout Section
42192 \begin_layout Standard
42193 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42194 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42200 \begin_inset Index idx
42203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42205 -packages ! amsmath
42215 \begin_inset Index idx
42218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42220 -packages ! amssymb
42230 \begin_inset Index idx
42233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42245 \begin_inset Index idx
42248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42260 \begin_inset Index idx
42263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42265 -packages ! mathdots
42275 \begin_inset Index idx
42278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42280 -packages ! mathtools
42290 \begin_inset Index idx
42293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42305 \begin_inset Index idx
42308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42310 -packages ! stackrel
42320 \begin_inset Index idx
42323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42325 -packages ! stmaryrd
42335 \begin_inset Index idx
42338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42340 -packages ! undertilde
42345 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42348 \begin_layout Description
42349 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42350 -errors in formulas,
42351 ensure that you have this enabled.
42354 \begin_layout Description
42355 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42356 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42357 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42361 \begin_layout Description
42362 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42365 \begin_inset space ~
42377 \begin_layout Description
42378 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42381 \begin_inset space ~
42393 \begin_layout Description
42394 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42405 \begin_layout Description
42406 mathtools is used for the math commands
42442 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42449 \begin_layout Description
42450 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42452 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42461 \begin_layout Description
42462 stackrel is used for the math command
42479 \begin_layout Description
42480 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42483 \begin_layout Description
42484 undertilde is used for the math command
42492 Accents for one Character
42501 \begin_layout Section
42505 \begin_layout Standard
42506 The float placement options are described in the section
42509 \begin_inset space ~
42517 \begin_inset space ~
42525 \begin_layout Section
42529 \begin_layout Standard
42530 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42532 Program Code Listings
42537 \begin_inset space ~
42545 \begin_layout Section
42549 \begin_layout Standard
42550 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42558 set to be used and set the
42563 The itemize environment is described in section
42564 \begin_inset space ~
42568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42570 reference "sec:Itemize"
42577 \begin_layout Standard
42578 You can furthermore specify a
42581 \begin_inset space ~
42586 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42587 command of the desired character.
42588 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42595 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42601 \begin_inset space \space{}
42605 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42615 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42616 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42619 \begin_layout Standard
42620 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42628 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42629 -packages in the preamble (menu
42632 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42633 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42642 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42646 usepackage{textcomp}
42649 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42653 usepackage{amssymb}
42663 \begin_layout Section
42667 \begin_layout Standard
42668 Branches are described in section
42669 \begin_inset space ~
42673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42675 reference "sec:Branches"
42682 \begin_layout Section
42684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42686 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42693 \begin_layout Standard
42694 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42697 \begin_layout Description
42699 \begin_inset space ~
42703 \begin_inset space ~
42706 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42726 View Master Document
42727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42734 Update Master Document
42735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42742 menu or the toolbar.
42743 The default is set in
42745 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42746 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42748 \begin_inset space ~
42751 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42755 \begin_inset space ~
42759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42761 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42768 \begin_layout Description
42770 \begin_inset space ~
42774 \begin_inset space ~
42777 Output settings for the menu
42779 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42781 \begin_inset space ~
42787 For a detailed description see section
42789 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42794 \begin_inset space ~
42802 \begin_layout Description
42804 \begin_inset space ~
42808 \begin_inset space ~
42811 Options offers settings for the export format
42819 \begin_inset space ~
42824 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42825 \begin_inset space ~
42828 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42832 \begin_inset space ~
42837 settings are described in detail in section
42839 Math Output in XHTML
42844 \begin_inset space ~
42853 \begin_inset space ~
42857 \begin_inset space ~
42862 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42865 \begin_layout Section
42873 \begin_layout Standard
42874 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42876 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42878 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42880 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42884 \begin_layout Standard
42885 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42886 -syntax is given in section
42887 \begin_inset space ~
42891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42893 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42900 \begin_layout Chapter
42906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42908 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42913 \begin_inset Index idx
42916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42925 \begin_layout Standard
42926 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42928 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42932 It has the following submenus.
42935 \begin_layout Section
42939 \begin_layout Subsection
42943 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42944 User Interface File
42945 \begin_inset Index idx
42948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42949 Customization ! of toolbars
42955 \begin_inset Index idx
42958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42959 Customization ! of menus
42967 \begin_layout Standard
42968 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42969 interface (ui) file.
42970 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42978 \begin_layout Description
42983 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42986 \begin_layout Description
42993 the menu entries in popup context menus
42996 \begin_layout Description
43001 specifies the toolbar buttons
43004 \begin_layout Standard
43005 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43006 and edit the entries.
43009 \begin_layout Standard
43010 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43022 entries must be finished with an explicit
43047 and in the case of the
43048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43060 The syntax for the entries is:
43063 \begin_layout Standard
43064 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43093 \begin_layout Standard
43095 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43098 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43099 -functions are listed in the menu
43101 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43103 \begin_inset space ~
43111 \begin_layout Standard
43112 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43118 \begin_layout Standard
43119 For example, assuming you use the menu
43121 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43124 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43128 \begin_layout Standard
43129 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43153 \begin_layout Standard
43155 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43170 to have the sixth bookmark.
43173 \begin_layout Standard
43177 \begin_inset space ~
43182 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43183 's toolbar buttons.
43184 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43185 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43188 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43199 \begin_layout Standard
43202 Enable tool tips in main work area
43204 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43208 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43212 \begin_layout Standard
43217 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43218 should display in the menu
43220 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43230 \begin_layout Subsection
43234 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43238 \begin_layout Standard
43241 Restore window layouts and geometries
43244 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43245 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43249 \begin_layout Standard
43252 Restore cursor positions
43254 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43258 \begin_layout Standard
43261 Load opened files from last session
43263 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43267 \begin_layout Standard
43270 Clear all session information
43272 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43273 sessions (cursor positions, names
43274 of last opened documents, etc.).
43277 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43281 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43286 \begin_inset Index idx
43289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43298 \begin_layout Standard
43301 Backup original documents when saving
43303 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43304 it was saved the last time.
43305 It is stored in the
43308 \begin_inset space ~
43314 \begin_inset space ~
43318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43320 reference "sec:Paths"
43324 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43327 \begin_inset space ~
43333 The backup file has the file extension
43334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43348 \begin_layout Standard
43351 Backup documents, every
43353 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43356 \begin_layout Standard
43359 Save documents compressed by default
43361 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43362 \begin_inset space ~
43366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43368 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43373 This applies to newly created documents only.
43374 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43377 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43378 Windows & work area
43381 \begin_layout Standard
43384 Open documents in tabs
43386 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43390 \begin_layout Standard
43395 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43408 reference "sec:Paths"
43412 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43419 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43420 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43421 of \SpecialChar LyX
43423 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43424 instance is created for each file.
43427 \begin_layout Standard
43430 Single close-tab button
43432 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43442 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43443 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43446 \begin_layout Standard
43447 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43455 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43456 before the change takes effect.
43464 \begin_layout Standard
43469 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43471 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43473 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43477 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43478 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43479 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43482 \begin_layout Subsection
43484 \begin_inset Index idx
43487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43496 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43503 \begin_layout Standard
43504 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43508 \begin_layout Standard
43509 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43517 This section only deals with the fonts
43521 the \SpecialChar LyX
43523 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43527 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43538 \begin_layout Standard
43539 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43556 (depends on the system) as its
43559 \begin_inset space ~
43575 \begin_layout Standard
43576 You can change the font size with the
43583 \begin_layout Standard
43588 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43593 points have the size of 1
43594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43598 \begin_inset space ~
43602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43604 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43609 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43614 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43615 \begin_inset space ~
43619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43621 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43628 \begin_layout Standard
43631 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43633 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43634 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43635 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43636 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43637 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43639 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43640 \begin_inset space ~
43646 \begin_layout Subsection
43648 \begin_inset Index idx
43651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43652 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43659 \begin_inset Index idx
43662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43671 \begin_layout Standard
43672 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43673 by choosing an item in the
43674 list and selecting the
43681 \begin_layout Standard
43682 By checking the option
43686 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43689 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43690 \begin_inset space ~
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43699 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43702 \begin_layout Subsection
43704 \begin_inset Index idx
43707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43716 \begin_layout Standard
43717 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43721 \begin_layout Standard
43726 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43727 This feature is described in section
43728 \begin_inset space ~
43732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43734 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43741 \begin_layout Standard
43742 Checking the option
43745 \begin_inset space ~
43749 \begin_inset space ~
43753 \begin_inset space ~
43758 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43761 \begin_layout Section
43763 \begin_inset Index idx
43766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43775 \begin_layout Subsection
43779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43783 \begin_layout Standard
43786 Cursor follows scrollbar
43788 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43792 \begin_layout Standard
43793 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43794 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43795 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43798 \begin_layout Standard
43801 Scroll below end of document
43803 is self-explanatory.
43806 \begin_layout Standard
43807 In \SpecialChar LyX
43808 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43815 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43817 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43818 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43821 \begin_layout Standard
43824 Sort environments alphabetically
43826 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43829 \begin_layout Standard
43832 Group environments by their category
43834 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43837 \begin_layout Standard
43842 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43853 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43857 \begin_layout Standard
43858 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43863 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43864 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43868 \begin_layout Subsection
43870 \begin_inset Index idx
43873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43880 \begin_inset Index idx
43883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43884 Settings ! Shortcuts
43892 \begin_layout Standard
43897 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43899 Several binding files are available, among them:
43902 \begin_layout Description
43903 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43906 \begin_layout Description
43907 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43919 \begin_layout Description
43920 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43931 \begin_layout Standard
43932 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43937 , and binding files for special languages.
43938 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43943 \begin_inset space \space{}
43947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43955 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43956 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43957 will try to use the appropriate binding
43961 \begin_layout Standard
43962 Some binding files, like
43966 , only have a limited scope.
43967 When looking at the end of the file
43971 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43974 \begin_layout Standard
43978 \begin_inset space ~
43982 \begin_inset space ~
43987 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43988 in the selected key binding file.
43991 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43995 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44000 \begin_inset Index idx
44003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44004 Key Bindings ! Editing
44012 \begin_layout Standard
44013 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44014 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44015 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44016 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44019 Show key-bindings containing
44022 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44023 Insert there for example as keyword
44024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44031 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44032 functions that contain
44033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44041 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44042 All \SpecialChar LyX
44043 functions are also listed in the file
44048 that you will find in the
44055 \begin_layout Standard
44056 For example, to add the shortcut
44064 , select the function and press the
44069 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44070 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44073 \begin_layout Standard
44074 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44075 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44077 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44078 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44080 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44085 \begin_layout Standard
44086 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44089 \begin_layout Standard
44090 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44092 The syntax of the entries is:
44095 \begin_layout Standard
44101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44120 \begin_layout Subsection
44122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44124 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44129 \begin_inset Index idx
44132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44139 \begin_inset Index idx
44142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44143 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44151 \begin_layout Standard
44152 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44153 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44154 provides keyboard maps.
44155 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44156 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44159 \begin_inset space ~
44163 \begin_inset space ~
44168 and select the keyboard map file named
44175 \begin_layout Standard
44184 keyboard map and, if you use the
44188 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44191 arg "keymap-primary"
44197 arg "keymap-secondary"
44200 respectively or toggle between them with
44203 arg "keymap-toggle"
44209 \begin_layout Standard
44210 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44218 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44227 \begin_layout Standard
44228 You can also specify the mouse
44230 Wheel scrolling speed
44233 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44237 Middle mouse button pasting
44239 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44240 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44243 \begin_layout Standard
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44255 \begin_inset space ~
44260 you can select a key for zooming.
44261 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44264 \begin_layout Subsection
44268 \begin_layout Standard
44269 Input completion is described in section
44270 \begin_inset space ~
44274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44276 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44283 \begin_layout Section
44285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44292 \begin_inset Index idx
44295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44302 \begin_inset Index idx
44305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44314 \begin_layout Standard
44315 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44316 are normally determined during
44318 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44321 \begin_layout Description
44323 \begin_inset space ~
44326 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44327 's working directory.
44328 It is the default when you
44339 \begin_inset space ~
44347 \begin_layout Description
44349 \begin_inset space ~
44352 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44354 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44356 \begin_inset space ~
44360 \begin_inset space ~
44368 \begin_layout Description
44370 \begin_inset space ~
44373 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44379 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44383 \begin_inset Newline newline
44387 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44399 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44400 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44408 \begin_layout Description
44410 \begin_inset space ~
44414 \begin_inset Index idx
44417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44423 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44424 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44425 \begin_inset space ~
44429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44431 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44439 will be used to save the backups.
44440 \begin_inset Newline newline
44443 Backup files have the ending
44444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44454 \begin_layout Description
44456 \begin_inset space ~
44459 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44460 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44462 \begin_inset Newline newline
44469 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44475 You can edit this file with the program
44484 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44485 in its preferences under
44488 \begin_inset space ~
44494 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44499 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44501 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44502 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44508 and \SpecialChar LyX
44509 need to be running the same time.
44510 \begin_inset Newline newline
44513 The pipe is also used for the
44518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44524 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44529 \begin_inset Newline newline
44532 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44533 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44534 \begin_inset Newline newline
44550 \begin_layout Description
44552 \begin_inset space ~
44555 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44558 \begin_layout Description
44560 \begin_inset space ~
44563 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44564 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44565 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44568 \begin_layout Description
44570 \begin_inset space ~
44573 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44579 You only need to specify it if you are using
44583 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44585 For \SpecialChar LyX
44590 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44594 \begin_layout Description
44596 \begin_inset space ~
44599 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44600 When \SpecialChar LyX
44601 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44602 to find it on the system.
44603 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44605 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44614 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44615 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44618 \begin_layout Description
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44623 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44624 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44625 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44626 code or in the document
44628 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44630 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44631 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44632 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44633 scanned for the input files.
44634 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44635 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44637 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44638 compilation may fail for some documents.
44641 \begin_layout Section
44645 \begin_layout Standard
44646 Here you can insert your
44655 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44657 \begin_inset space ~
44661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44663 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44667 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44670 \begin_layout Section
44672 \begin_inset Index idx
44675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44676 Language ! Settings
44682 \begin_inset Index idx
44685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44686 Settings ! Language
44694 \begin_layout Subsection
44696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44698 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44705 \begin_layout Description
44707 \begin_inset space ~
44711 \begin_inset space ~
44714 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44716 You can find its actual translation status here:
44717 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44719 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44726 \begin_layout Description
44728 \begin_inset space ~
44731 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44732 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44733 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44734 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44751 The most widespread language package is
44756 \begin_inset Index idx
44759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44766 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44768 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44769 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44770 come with the alternative
44776 \begin_inset Index idx
44779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44781 -packages ! polyglossia
44786 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44787 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44793 The available selections are described in section
44794 \begin_inset space ~
44798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44800 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44807 \begin_layout Description
44809 \begin_inset space ~
44812 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44813 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44814 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44815 An example is the start command
44821 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44823 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44827 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44842 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44847 \begin_layout Description
44849 \begin_inset space ~
44857 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44858 command toggles the package on and off.
44861 \begin_layout Description
44863 \begin_inset space ~
44867 \begin_inset space ~
44870 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44874 \begin_layout Description
44876 \begin_inset space ~
44880 \begin_inset space ~
44883 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44887 \begin_layout Description
44889 \begin_inset space ~
44893 \begin_inset space ~
44896 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44897 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44898 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44900 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44907 \begin_layout Description
44909 \begin_inset space ~
44912 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44914 When this option is not set, the
44917 \begin_inset space ~
44922 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44924 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44927 \begin_inset space ~
44935 \begin_layout Description
44937 \begin_inset space ~
44943 \begin_inset space ~
44949 When it is not set, the
44952 \begin_inset space ~
44957 is set to the end of the document.
44960 \begin_layout Description
44962 \begin_inset space ~
44966 \begin_inset space ~
44969 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44970 language will be underlined in blue.
44973 \begin_layout Description
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44982 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44983 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44986 \begin_layout Description
44988 \begin_inset space ~
44991 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44992 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44993 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44994 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44997 \begin_layout Subsection
45001 \begin_layout Standard
45002 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45003 \begin_inset space ~
45007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45009 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45016 \begin_layout Section
45020 \begin_layout Subsection
45024 \begin_layout Description
45026 \begin_inset space ~
45029 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45031 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45033 \begin_inset space ~
45039 For a detailed description see section
45041 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45046 \begin_inset space ~
45054 \begin_layout Description
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45062 \begin_layout Description
45064 \begin_inset space ~
45068 \begin_inset space ~
45071 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45074 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45075 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45077 \begin_inset space ~
45083 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45086 \begin_layout Description
45088 \begin_inset space ~
45092 \begin_inset Index idx
45095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45102 \begin_inset Index idx
45105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45106 Settings ! Date format
45111 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45112 \begin_inset Newline newline
45116 \begin_inset Flex URL
45119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45121 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45127 \begin_inset Newline newline
45130 For example the format
45131 \begin_inset Newline newline
45135 \begin_inset Newline newline
45138 prints the date as day/month/year.
45141 \begin_layout Description
45143 \begin_inset space ~
45147 \begin_inset space ~
45150 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45151 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45154 \begin_layout Description
45156 \begin_inset space ~
45159 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45161 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45169 For a detailed description see section
45171 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45176 \begin_inset space ~
45184 \begin_layout Subsection
45190 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45192 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45197 \begin_inset Index idx
45200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45201 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45210 \begin_layout Description
45212 \begin_inset space ~
45220 \begin_inset space ~
45224 \begin_inset space ~
45227 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45232 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45253 are used for Cyrillic.
45254 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45267 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45269 sets up in the background.
45270 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45273 \begin_layout Description
45275 \begin_inset space ~
45279 \begin_inset space ~
45283 \begin_inset space ~
45287 \begin_inset space ~
45290 options They only have an effect when the program
45294 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45297 \begin_layout Standard
45298 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45299 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45300 manuals of the applications.
45303 \begin_layout Description
45305 \begin_inset space ~
45308 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45309 \begin_inset space ~
45313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45315 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45322 \begin_layout Description
45324 \begin_inset space ~
45327 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45328 \begin_inset space ~
45332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45334 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45341 \begin_layout Description
45343 \begin_inset space ~
45346 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45347 \begin_inset space ~
45351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45353 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45360 \begin_layout Description
45366 \begin_inset space ~
45369 command Command for the program
45371 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45374 that is described in the section
45376 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45381 Additional Features
45386 \begin_layout Standard
45387 There are additionally the following options:
45390 \begin_layout Description
45392 \begin_inset space ~
45396 \begin_inset space ~
45400 \begin_inset space ~
45404 \begin_inset space ~
45409 \begin_inset space ~
45412 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45430 to separate folders.
45431 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45433 \begin_inset Index idx
45436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45443 \begin_inset Index idx
45446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45455 \begin_layout Description
45457 \begin_inset space ~
45461 \begin_inset space ~
45465 \begin_inset space ~
45469 \begin_inset space ~
45473 \begin_inset space ~
45477 \begin_inset space ~
45480 changes Removes all manually set
45486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45487 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45494 dialog when changing the document class.
45497 \begin_layout Section
45499 \begin_inset space ~
45503 \begin_inset Index idx
45506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45515 \begin_layout Subsection
45517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45519 name "subsec:Converters"
45524 \begin_inset Index idx
45527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45536 \begin_layout Standard
45537 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45538 from one format to another.
45539 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45540 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45547 \begin_inset space ~
45552 field and press the
45557 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45561 \begin_inset space ~
45566 drop-down list, modify the
45570 field and press the
45577 \begin_layout Standard
45580 Converter File Cache
45586 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45588 Maximum Age (in days
45591 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45592 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45595 \begin_layout Standard
45596 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45597 definition, is described in the section
45608 \begin_layout Subsection
45610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45612 name "sec:File-Formats"
45617 \begin_inset Index idx
45620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45627 \begin_inset Index idx
45630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45639 \begin_layout Standard
45640 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45650 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45653 \begin_layout Standard
45654 You can also define the
45656 Default output format
45658 that is used when you use
45660 View, Update, View Master Document
45664 Update Master Document
45670 menu or the toolbar.
45673 \begin_layout Standard
45674 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45685 \begin_layout Standard
45686 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45688 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45689 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45690 This is done by specifying a
45695 More about this is described in the section
45706 \begin_layout Chapter
45707 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45709 \begin_inset Index idx
45712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45721 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45728 \begin_layout Standard
45730 \begin_inset space ~
45734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45736 reference "tab:Units"
45740 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45741 and used in this documentation.
45744 \begin_layout Standard
45745 \begin_inset Float table
45751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45752 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45770 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45778 \begin_inset Tabular
45779 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45780 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45781 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45782 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45783 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45920 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45989 scaled point (65536
45990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46068 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46141 % of original image width
46146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46457 \begin_layout Chapter
46459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46461 name "chap:Credits"
46468 \begin_layout Standard
46469 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46470 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46473 \begin_layout Itemize
46476 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46479 \begin_layout Itemize
46485 \begin_layout Itemize
46491 \begin_layout Itemize
46497 \begin_layout Itemize
46503 \begin_layout Itemize
46509 \begin_layout Itemize
46515 \begin_layout Itemize
46521 \begin_layout Itemize
46524 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46527 \begin_layout Itemize
46533 \begin_layout Itemize
46539 \begin_layout Itemize
46545 \begin_layout Itemize
46551 \begin_layout Itemize
46557 \begin_layout Itemize
46563 \begin_layout Itemize
46569 \begin_layout Itemize
46575 \begin_layout Itemize
46576 The \SpecialChar LyX
46578 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46587 \begin_layout Standard
46588 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46591 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46598 \begin_layout Bibliography
46599 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46600 LatexCommand bibitem
46606 The \SpecialChar LyX
46608 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46611 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46616 \begin_inset Newline newline
46620 \begin_inset Flex URL
46623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46625 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46633 \begin_layout Bibliography
46634 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46635 LatexCommand bibitem
46636 key "latexcompanion"
46640 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46642 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46643 Companion Second Edition.
46646 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46649 \begin_layout Bibliography
46650 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46651 LatexCommand bibitem
46656 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46659 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46663 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46666 \begin_layout Bibliography
46667 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46668 LatexCommand bibitem
46676 : A Document Preparation System.
46679 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46682 \begin_layout Bibliography
46683 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46684 LatexCommand bibitem
46693 The \SpecialChar TeX
46697 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46700 \begin_layout Bibliography
46701 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46702 LatexCommand bibitem
46707 The \SpecialChar TeX
46709 \begin_inset Newline newline
46713 \begin_inset Flex URL
46716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46718 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46726 \begin_layout Bibliography
46727 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46728 LatexCommand bibitem
46733 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46735 \begin_inset Newline newline
46739 \begin_inset Flex URL
46742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46744 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46752 \begin_layout Bibliography
46753 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46754 LatexCommand bibitem
46760 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46762 name "Documentation"
46763 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46769 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46773 \begin_inset Newline newline
46777 \begin_inset Flex URL
46780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46782 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46790 \begin_layout Bibliography
46791 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46792 LatexCommand bibitem
46798 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46800 name "Documentation"
46801 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46805 how to use the program
46807 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46811 \begin_inset Newline newline
46815 \begin_inset Flex URL
46818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46820 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46828 \begin_layout Bibliography
46829 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46830 LatexCommand bibitem
46836 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46838 name "Documentation"
46839 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46848 \begin_inset Newline newline
46852 \begin_inset Flex URL
46855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46857 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46865 \begin_layout Bibliography
46866 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46867 LatexCommand bibitem
46868 key "makeindex-man"
46873 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46876 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46885 \begin_inset Newline newline
46889 \begin_inset Flex URL
46892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46894 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46902 \begin_layout Bibliography
46903 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46904 LatexCommand bibitem
46910 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46912 name "Documentation"
46913 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46922 \begin_inset Newline newline
46926 \begin_inset Flex URL
46929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46931 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46939 \begin_layout Bibliography
46940 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46941 LatexCommand bibitem
46947 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46949 name "Documentation"
46950 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46954 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46956 \begin_inset Newline newline
46960 \begin_inset Flex URL
46963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46965 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46973 \begin_layout Bibliography
46974 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46975 LatexCommand bibitem
46981 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46983 name "Documentation"
46984 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46988 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46994 \begin_inset Index idx
46997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46999 -packages ! caption
47005 \begin_inset Newline newline
47009 \begin_inset Flex URL
47012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47014 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47022 \begin_layout Bibliography
47023 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47024 LatexCommand bibitem
47030 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47032 name "Documentation"
47033 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47037 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47043 \begin_inset Index idx
47046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47048 -packages ! enumitem
47054 \begin_inset Newline newline
47058 \begin_inset Flex URL
47061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47063 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47071 \begin_layout Bibliography
47072 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47073 LatexCommand bibitem
47079 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47081 name "Documentation"
47082 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47086 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47092 \begin_inset Index idx
47095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47097 -packages ! fancyhdr
47103 \begin_inset Newline newline
47107 \begin_inset Flex URL
47110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47112 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47120 \begin_layout Bibliography
47121 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47122 LatexCommand bibitem
47128 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47130 name "Documentation"
47131 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47135 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47141 \begin_inset Index idx
47144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47146 -packages ! hyperref
47152 \begin_inset Newline newline
47156 \begin_inset Flex URL
47159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47161 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47169 \begin_layout Bibliography
47170 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47171 LatexCommand bibitem
47177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47179 name "Documentation"
47180 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47184 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47190 \begin_inset Index idx
47193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47195 -packages ! nomencl
47201 \begin_inset Newline newline
47205 \begin_inset Flex URL
47208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47210 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47218 \begin_layout Bibliography
47219 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47220 LatexCommand bibitem
47226 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47228 name "Documentation"
47229 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47233 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47239 \begin_inset Index idx
47242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47244 -packages ! prettyref
47250 \begin_inset Newline newline
47254 \begin_inset Flex URL
47257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47259 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47267 \begin_layout Bibliography
47268 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47269 LatexCommand bibitem
47275 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47277 name "Documentation"
47278 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47282 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47288 \begin_inset Index idx
47291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47293 -packages ! refstyle
47299 \begin_inset Newline newline
47303 \begin_inset Flex URL
47306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47308 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47316 \begin_layout Bibliography
47317 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47318 LatexCommand bibitem
47324 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47327 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47331 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47333 \begin_inset Newline newline
47337 \begin_inset Flex URL
47340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47342 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47350 \begin_layout Bibliography
47351 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47352 LatexCommand bibitem
47358 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47361 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47365 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47367 \begin_inset Newline newline
47371 \begin_inset Flex URL
47374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47376 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47384 \begin_layout Bibliography
47385 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47386 LatexCommand bibitem
47392 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47395 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47399 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47400 for Cyrillic languages:
47401 \begin_inset Newline newline
47405 \begin_inset Flex URL
47408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47410 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47418 \begin_layout Bibliography
47419 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47420 LatexCommand bibitem
47426 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47429 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47433 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47435 \begin_inset Newline newline
47439 \begin_inset Flex URL
47442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47444 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47452 \begin_layout Bibliography
47453 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47454 LatexCommand bibitem
47460 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47463 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47467 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47469 \begin_inset Newline newline
47473 \begin_inset Flex URL
47476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47478 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47486 \begin_layout Bibliography
47487 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47488 LatexCommand bibitem
47494 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47497 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47501 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47503 \begin_inset Newline newline
47507 \begin_inset Flex URL
47510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47512 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47520 \begin_layout Bibliography
47521 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47522 LatexCommand bibitem
47528 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47531 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47535 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47537 \begin_inset Newline newline
47541 \begin_inset Flex URL
47544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47546 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47554 \begin_layout Bibliography
47555 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47556 LatexCommand bibitem
47562 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47565 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47569 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47571 \begin_inset Newline newline
47575 \begin_inset Flex URL
47578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47580 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47588 \begin_layout Bibliography
47589 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47590 LatexCommand bibitem
47596 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47599 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47603 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47605 \begin_inset Newline newline
47609 \begin_inset Flex URL
47612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47614 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47622 \begin_layout Bibliography
47623 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47624 LatexCommand bibitem
47630 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47633 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47637 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47639 \begin_inset Newline newline
47643 \begin_inset Flex URL
47646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47648 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47656 \begin_layout Bibliography
47657 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47658 LatexCommand bibitem
47664 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47667 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47671 about new features in
47677 \begin_inset Newline newline
47681 \begin_inset Flex URL
47684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47686 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47694 \begin_layout Standard
47695 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47729 \begin_inset Note Note
47732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47739 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47740 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47741 bibliography is the second one:
47749 \begin_layout Standard
47750 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47751 LatexCommand bibtex
47752 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47753 options "biblio/alphadin"
47760 \begin_layout Standard
47761 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47765 \begin_layout Standard
47766 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47767 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47773 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47774 LatexCommand printindex